Home

CNC 800T USER

1. Chapter 3 Section Page AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS EXECUTION SIMULATION 19 P99996 3 10 1 5 DISPLAY MODES There are 4 display modes which can be selected by means of the following keys STANDARD ACTUAL POSITION 2 FOLLOWING ERROR ARITHMETIC PARAMETER STANDARD display mode It is the mode described before When accessing the Execution of program P99996 option the CNC selects this display mode ACTUAL POSITION display mode AUTOMATIC P99996 N0000 ACTUAL POSITION X 0000 000 Z4 0000 000 o 0000 TOO F0000 000 7 100 S0000 72100 TO00 00 G05 01 95 M41 FOLLOWING ERROR display mode AUTOMATIC P99996 N0000 FOLLOWING ERROR X 0000 000 Z4 0000 000 F0000 000 73100 S0000 73100 T00 00 G05 01 95 M41 Page Chapter 3 Section 20 AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS EXECUTION SIMULATION P99996 ARITHMETIC PARAMETERS display mode AUTOMATIC P99996 N0000 P000 0 0000000 P001 0 0000000 P002 0 0000000 P003 0 0000000 P004 0 0000000 P005 0 0000000 P006 0 0000000 P007 0 0000000 COMMAND ACTUAL TO GO X 0000 000 X 0000 000 X 0000 000 Z 0000 000 Z 0000 000 Z 0000 000 S 0000 S 0000 RPM F0000 000 100 S0000 100 T00 00 G05 01 95 M41 This mode shows a group of 8 arithmetic parameters To view the previous and following ones use these keys e Displays the previous parameters o Displays the following ones The value of each parameter may be expressed in one of the fo
2. Page 46 Chapter 5 Section AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS SLOT MILLING Example in diameters We want to mill 5 slots at 72 from eachother starting at 0 they will be 30mm long and will be milled at a diameter of 46mm The live tool will turn at 1000 rpm and the milling feedrate will be F1000 1m min Z LO BEcIN X 46 Z 20 Q X 46 zw 46 Once selected the CNC will show the following type of information F 1000 9100 TRPM 1500 90100 T3 BEGIN X46 000 Z 20 000 END X46 000 Z 50 000 a 0 A 72 N 5 Safety Distance X 5 000 Safety Distance Z 5 000 Chapter 5 Section Page AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS SLOT MILLING 47 5 IIUSAGE OF THE SAFETY DISTANCE Whenever an automatic operation is executed in the automatic mode CYCLE mode the CNC applies the values defined as safety distance along X and Z OV OIL A A Li OI OI Z NS SSS SS WN N N NS QIK AS NN Y ANANN N Wotan SS Taper turning The figure on the left shows how the safety distance along X may be used so the BEGIN point of the operation is located outside the part thus preventing collisions between the tool and the part The figure on the right shows how the safety distance along Z may be used to carry out two machining operations in one Taper turning Regular turning Page Chapter 5 Section 48 AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS USAGE OF SAFETY DISTANCE Rounding X F PETT I
3. INTRODUCTION SAFETY CONDITIONS Readthe following safety measures in orderto prevent damage to personnel to this product and to those products connected to it This unit must only be repaired by personnel authorized by Fagor Automation Fagor Automation shall notbe held responsible for any physical or material damage derived from the violation of these basic safety regulations Precautions against personal damage Before powering the unit up make sure that it is connected to ground Inorderto avoidelectrical discharges make sure that all the grounding connections are properly made Do not work in humid environments In order to avoid electrical discharges always work under 90 of relative humidity non condensing and 45 C 113 F Do not work in explosive environments In order to avoid risks damage do no work in explosive environments Precautions against product damage Working environment This unit is ready to be used in Industrial Environments complying with the directives and regulations effective in the European Community Fagor Automation shall not be held responsible for any damage suffered or caused when installed in other environments residential or homes Install the unit in the right place Itisrecommended whenever possible to instal the CNC away from coolants chemical product blows etc that could damage it This unit complies with the European directives on electromagnetic compatibility Nev
4. P99 2 French P9923 Italian P99 4 Portuguese P99 5 Taiwanese P99 6 Swedish P99 7 Norwegian P99 8 1000 LINE ENCODER AS 1250 LINE AS ENCODER This feature permits the CNC adapt a 1000 line encoder to be used as 1250 line encoder P623 7 Adapts the X axis feedback encoder O No 1 Yes P623 8 Adapts the Z axis feedback encoder O No 1 Yes A typical case Having a 1000 line for a 5 mm pitch ballscrew The calculations necessary to set the axis resolution will be made with the selected pulses 1000 or 1250 CROSS COMPENSATION Cross compensation is used for compensating the measuring error suffered by the X axis when moving the Z axis P623 6 Cross compensation applied on to the X axis O No 1 Yes When using cross compensation no leadscrew compensation may be applied on the X axis only on to the Z axis since its corresponding table is being used for cross compensation with the following values POO X 7777 22 P01 DX 0 2 in order to properly apply cross compensation set P605 2 1 and P623 6 1 Note The cross compensation table must meet the same requirements as those for the leadscrew error compensation See section 3 8 4 of the installation manual PLCI INPUT 1104 When the Feedrate Override Switch on the operator panel is set on one of the handwheel positions x1 x10 x100 input I104 is set to 1 11 i 2 Version 6 9 February 1999 NEW MACHINE P
5. X 30 seca X 20 exp E ee I 4 4 Movement at F L to Rapid movement M 4 Pig F Basic parameters defining a cycle P100 X coordinate of the BEGIN point in the selected units in radius or diameter P101 Z coordinate of the BEGIN point P102 X coordinate of the END point in the selected units in radius or diameter P103 Z coordinate of the END point P4 Angular increment D between holes It must be given in degrees P5 Number of holes to be drilled N P8 Maximum pecking depth chip removal P When referred to the X axis it must be expressed in radius P13 Sets the time the drill bit will remain at the bottom of the hole Itis given in seconds Therefore P132K 1 5 means 1 5 seconds Page Chapter 8 Section 14 MACHINING CANNED CYCLES MULTIPLE DRILLING G67 N6 P16 Indicates the angular position a of the first hole P19 Safety distance along the X axis in radius P20 Safety distance along the Z axis General concepts 1 The machining conditions feedrate spindle speed etc must be programmed before calling the cycle 2 These parameters must be programmed in the block before the one calling the cycle N2 F10 1000 M03 N4 P100 K P101 K P102 K P103 K P4 K P5 K P8 K P13 K P16 K N6 G67 N6 3 The canned cycle does not alter the call parameters P22
6. Tool dimension values too large gt Zero offset values G53 G59 too large Canned cycle profile defined incorrectly A block has been programmed which is incorrect either by itself or in relation with the program history up to that instant Functions G20 G21 G22 G23 G24 G25 G26 G27 G28 G29 G30 G31 G32 G50 G53 G54 G55 G56 G57 G58 G59 G72 G73 G74 G92 and G93 must be programmed alone in a block The called subroutine or block does not exist or the block searched by means of special function F17 does not exist Negative or too large thread pitch value Error in blocks where the points are defined by means of angle angle or angle coordinate This error is issued in the following cases gt After defining G20 G21 G22 or G23 the number of the subroutine it refers to is missing gt The N character has not been programmed after function G25 G26 G27 G28 or G29 gt Too many nesting levels More than one spindle range have been defined in the same block This error will be issued in the following cases gt There is no block at the address defined by the parameter assigned to F18 F19 F20 F21 F22 gt The corresponding axis has not been defined in the addressed block An axis is repeated when programming G74 K has not been programmed after G04 Error in a definition block or subroutine call or when defining either conditional or unconditional jumps This error is issued in the following cases
7. Use the to display the display the previous and following lines To edit a new line follow this procedure 1 If the program line number appearing at the bottom of the screen is not the desired one clear it by pressing CL and key in the desired line number 2 Key in all the pertinent data for that line and press ENTER The programming format to be used is described in the programming manual The keys on the front panel may be used X Z S E N as well as TOOL for T rere for P gt for R and fa for A However since some function keys are missing G M I K an assisted editor 1s also available To access it press AUX After analyzing the syntax of what has been edited so far the CNC will display one by one all the functions which can be edited at the time Press CL to delete characters To modify a previously edited line proceed as follows 1 Ifthe program line number appearing at the bottom of the screen is not the desired one clear it by pressing CL and key in the desired line number 2 Press RECALL The bottom of the screen of the CNC editing area will show the contents of that line 3 Use one of these methods to modify the contents a Use the CL key to delete characters and edit it as described above b Use the keys to position the cursor over the section to be modified and use the CL key to delete characters or INC ABS
8. The program must end with either 20 NULL characters ASCII 00 or with one ESCAPE character or with one EOT character Press CL to cancel the transmission The CNC will issue the message PROCESS ABORTED FLOPPY DISK UNIT DIRECTORY This option displays the programs stored on the disk inserted in the FAGOR Floppy Disk Unit and the number of characters size of each one of them It also shows the number of free characters available free memory space on the tape DELETE FLOPPY DISK UNIT PROGRAM 3 8 2 With this option it is possible to delete a program contained at the FAGOR Floppy Disk Unit The CNC requests the number of the program to be deleted After keying in the desired number press ENTER Once the program has been deleted the CNC will display the message PROGRAM NUM P____ DELETED It also shows the number of free characters on the disk free memory space DNC COMMUNICATIONS To be able to use this feature the DNC communication must be active the upper right hand side of the screen shows DNC To do this the corresponding parameters P605 5 6 7 8 P606 8 must be set accordingly and option 6 of the Peripherals mode selected if it was not active Once active and by using the FAGORDNC application software supplied upon request in floppy disks it is possible to perform the following operations from the computer Obtain the CNC s part program directory Transfer part programs and tab
9. the block is set as a special block skip This means that the CNC will execute it only if the corresponding conditional block skip input is activated In this case the conditional input may be activated while executing the block before the conditional one The special conditional block N4 cancels tool radius compensation G41 and G42 Page Chapter 1 Section PROGRAM WRITING BLOCK NUMBER 1 3 BLOCK CONTENTS It must be written with commands in ISO language especially designed to control the movements of the axes since it provides information and positioning conditions as well as feedrate data Each program block may contain the following functions Z ZA Preparatory functions Coordinates position values of the axes Feedrate Spindle turning speed Tool number Auxiliary miscellaneous functions This order must be maintained in the block although all these functions need not be in each block Depending on the selected work units mm or inches the following programming format must be used Millimeter format N4 G2 X 4 3 Z 4 3 F4 S4 T2 2 M2 Inch format N4 G2 X 3 4 Z 3 4 F4 S4 T2 2 M2 Throughout this manual the following formats will be mentioned and their meanings are N4 G2 F4 SA 12 2 M2 Block program line number indicating that the letter N must be followed by up to 4 digits NO through N9999 Referring to a preparatory function indicating th
10. 3 The machining conditions feedrate spindle rotation must be programmed before calling the cycle The parameters can be programmed either in the cycle calling block or in previous blocks This canned cycle does not alter the call parameters which may be used in later cycles However it does modify the values of parameters P70 through P99 The movements of the elemental work cycle see drawing are carried out as follows At the programmed feedrate from point 1 to point 2 and from 2 to 3 butin rapid from point 0 to point 1 and from 3 to 0 The exit conditions are G00 and G90 4 Ifthe position of the tool is not correct to execute the cycle error 4 will be issued If it is correct a prior horizontal turning will be carried out if necessary 5 Ifthere is a finishing pass the cycle will be completed on the tool s starting position 0 If there is no finishing pass the cycle will end at point F 6 Ifthelastmovementpriortocalling the canned cycle has been executed in GOO tool radius compensation G41 G42 can be used Otherwise error 35 will be issued Chapter 8 Section Page TURNING WITH CURVED MACHINING CANNED CYCLES SECTIONS G84 37 8 16 FACING CANNED CYCLE WITH CURVED SECTIONS G85 P1OCKD P181 MPT84 Format N4 G85 P0 K P1 K P2 K P3 K P5 K P7 K P8 K P9 K P18 K P19 K Parameter meaning P0 X coordinate
11. 320 The spindle will only be homed prior to being oriented whenever it is switched from operating in open loop to doing it in closed loop orientation When changing back from closed loop to open loop the display will show the spindle rpm by replacing the symbol with RPM characters The spindle will switch to open loop when pressing or after an emer gency or on power up Page Chapter 4 Section 6 SPINDLE SPINDLE ORIENTATION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS 5 1 INTRODUCTION This CNC has a series of keys to access each of the basic operations offered for a lathe All these keys have a lamp which stays on while the corresponding function is selected To de select it just press the key again The basic operations to choose from by pressing each one of these keys are EF Turning z f Facing a Taper turning a Rounding a Threading e Grooving Every time one of these operations is selected the CNC shows at the bottom of the screen the data corresponding to the selected operation and a help graphic All the basic operations except grooving can be executed in different ways either in SEMI AUTOMATIC or AUTOMATIC mode CYCLE 5 1 1 AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS IN SEMI AUTOMATIC MODE When selecting the SEMI AUTOMATIC mode the operator controls the movements of the machine by means of either mechanical handwheels electronic handwheels or JOG keys However in order to make it easi
12. ARE N00 G95 F10 S1000 M03 Machining conditions N05 GO X80 Z50 Goes to tool change position N06 T1 1 3Selects tool 1 N10 P22 K0 P23 K0 P26 0 There is no finishing pass N20 P100 K44 P101 K 135 P4 K1 P6 K38 P7 K15 P10 K4 P18 K3 P19 K1 P20 K136 N25 G67 N2 Taper turning 1 we a SSSSSS5 gt 5 gt gt gt gt gt gt 555555555 gt 5 gt gt 5555 gt N30 P16 K0 P100 K38 P101 K 125 P4 K1 P9 K3 P10 K4 P15 K0 P18 K3 P19 K1 P20 K126 N35 G67 NA Rounding N40 P16 K0 P100 K32 P101 K 124 P4 K1 P9 K1 P10 K4 P15 K1 P18 K3 P19 K1 P20 K126 N45 G67 NA Rounding N40 P100 K30 P101 K 98 P4 K1 P6 K28 P7 K100 P10 K4 P18 K3 P19 K1 P20 K99 N45 G67 N2 Taper turning N50 P100 K28 P101 K 70 P4 K1 P6 K24 P7 K100 P10 K4 P18 K3 P19 K1 P20 K71 N55 G67 N2 Taper turning N60 P100 K24 P101 K 27 P4 K1 P6 K19 P7 K6 41 P10 K4 P18 K3 P19 K1 P20 K28 N65 G67 N2 Taper turning a l p mE N70 P100 K19 P101 K0 P102 K19 P103 K 27 P4 K1 P6 K17 P19 K1 P20 K1 N75 G67 NO Turning N80 P100 K17 P101 K0 P102 K17 P103 K 17 P4 K1 P6 K16 P19 K1 P20 K1 N85 G67 NO Turning N90 P100 K16 P101 K0 P4 K1 P6 K14 P7 K100 P10 K4 P18 K2 P19 K13 P20 K1 N95 G67 N2 Taper turning N100 GO X80 Z50 Goes to tool change position N101 T2 2 3Selects tool 2 N105 P12 K2 P13 K0 5 Width and dwell N110 P100 K28 P101 K 85 P102 K28 P103 K 87 P4 K1 7 P6 K26 5 P19 K8 P20 K0 N115 G67 N5 Grooving N120 P100 K16 P101 K 15 P102 K17
13. RS 232C Communications Integrated PLC PLCI ISO coded program editing P99996 Execution of ISO coded program P99996 Graphics NEW FEATURES AND MODIFICATIONS Date April 1993 Software Version 2 1 and newer FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND SECTION Rapid jog depending on position of Feedrate Override Switch Operating Manual Section 2 3 1 Tool for the finishing pass Installation Manual Section 3 5 Operating Manual Section 3 5 Handwheel movement limited to maximum Operating Manual Section 2 3 3 allowed F Control of software travel limits when using a handwheel Display format for S Installation Manual Section 6 Possibility to activate deactivate outputs Ol O2 O3 after interrupting the program Automatic operation Profile Rounding Operating Manual Section 5 5 3 Profiles Operating Manual Chapter 6 Date October 1993 Software Version 3 1 and newer FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND SECTION Spindle acc dec Operating Manual Chapter 6 RPM Limitation when operating in CSS Operating Manual Section 4 3 1 Spindle orientation Installation Manual Section 6 4 1 Operating Manual Section 4 8 Live tool Installation Manual Section 5 9 Operating Manual Section 2 3 Automatic operation Simple Drilling Operating Manual Section 5 8 Automatic operation Multiple Drilling Operating Manual Section 5 9 Date December 1993 Software Version 3 2 and newer FEATURES A
14. gt Memory overflow gt Not enough free tape or CNC memory to store the part program I K has not been defined for a circular interpolation or thread 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 An attempt has been made to select a tool offset at the tool table or a non existent external tool the number of tools is set by machine parameter Too large a value assigned to a function This error is often issued when programming an F value in mm min inch min and then switching to work in mm rev inch rev without changing the F value The programmed G function does not exist Tool radius value too large Tool radius value too large 4 7 E d V T T Ta A A movement of over 8388 mm or 330 26 inches has been programmed Example Being the Z axis position Z 5000 if we want to move it to point Z5000 the CNC will issue error 33 when programming the block N10 Z5000 since the programmed move will be 25000 Z 5000 10000 mm In order to make this move without issuing this error it must be carried out in two stages as indicated below N10 ZO 5000 mm move N10 Z5000 5000 mm move S or F value too large Not enough information for corner rounding chamfering or compensation Repeated subroutine Function M19 programmed incorrectly Function G72 programmed incorrectly It must be borne in mind that if G72 is applied only to one axis this axis must be positioned a
15. 10 L E 9 34 z 10 60 2nd radius blend Straight to curve X A Starting point X20 Z60 i eee eee a L N100 G90 G01 G36 R10 X80 N110 G02 X60 Z10 I20 K 30 ire x o le ee ee e 7 30 2 d S x 10 y Elo 4g 7 10 30 60 Chapter 5 Section Page AUTOMATIC RADIUS PATH CONTROL BLEND G36 11 3rd radius blend Curve curve X1 R 28 R 28 30 MPT23 Starting point X60 Z90 N100 G90 G02 G36 R10 X60 Z50 R28 N110 X60 Z10 R28 Page Chapter 5 Section 12 PATH CONTROL AUTOMATIC RADIUS BLEND 5 11 CHAMFER G39 On turning operations it is possible to chamfer the intersection of two straight lines by using function G39 without having to calculate the intersection point G39 is not modal and therefore must be programmed every time a chamfer is desired This function must be programmed in the block whose end is to be chamfered A positive value of R4 3 in mm or R3 4 in inches sets the chamfer distance from the intersection point Example X axis programmed in diameter X Starting point X20 Z80 50 N100 G90 G01 G39 R10 X80 Z60 ral N110 X100 Z10 10 a 4 es 10 60 80 Z Chapter 5 Section Page PATH CONTROL CHAMFER G39 13 6 ADDITIONAL PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS 6 1 DWELL G04 By means of function G04 it is possible to program a dwell delay The amoun
16. 100 x 10 40 25 10 A P7 100 x tangent 14 036 25 40 P10 Quadrant to be machined Together with P18 it defines the type of corner P18 Indicates the corner geometry Together with P10 it defines the type of corner x T X ES Elk P10 4 P10 1 P10 1 P10 4 SQ XQ 10 2 p10 3 J4 P10 3 P10 2 P19 Safety distance along the X axis always in radius P20 Safety distance along the Z axis Page Chapter 8 Section 6 MACHINING CANNED CYCLES TAPER TURNING G67 N2 Parameters related to the finishing pass If no finishing pass is desired set P222K0 and P23 KO P22 Percentage 96 of programmed roughing pass used as finishing pass P23 Percentage of programmed roughing feedrate used as finishing feedrate Parameters related to the finishing tool When using one roughing tool and a different finishing tool set the following parameters When using the same tool for roughing and finishing set P262 KO P26 Indicates the finishing tool to be used If the manufacturer has set a tool change position arithmetic parameters P190 and P191 the axes will move to that position to change the tool Ifthe manufacturer has not set a tool change position arithmetic parameters P134 and P135 must be set for tool change position P134 Xcoordinate of the tool withdrawal point at the end ofthe cycle Itis setin the current work units in radius or diameter P135 Z coordinate of the tool withdrawal point at the end of the cycle
17. 8050611 R Defines the rounding radius H It defines the amount of material to be removed from the original piece It must be programmed in radius and with a positive value If programmed with a value of 0 the CNC will issue the corresponding error Chapter 5 Section Page AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS ROUNDING 25 Since there is no key to select it proceed as follows Select another data and use the up and down arrow keys to select this parameter H Depending on the sign assigned to H the roughing of the part will be performed as follows H It will carry out several passes All of them parallel to the programmed profile H It will first rough out the part turning or facing and it will run a final roughing pass to leave the finishing stock Fe i A Defines the distance between two consecutive rounding passes If programmed with a value of 0 the CNC will issue the corresponding error QT Defines the cutter angle indicating the angle between the cutter and the X axis as shown below Page Chapter 5 Section 26 AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS ROUNDING Since there is no key to select it proceed in one of the following ways Press several times Select another data and use the up and down arrow keys to select this parameter Q T If the cutter angle is less or equal to 45 the H and A values indicate the excess material and the step along X On
18. At the compact model e 9 gt At the modular model 0 e To set the area selected with the zoom window as he new display area press ENTER To see he selected area enlarged or reduced while keeping the previous display area values press SIMUL at the compact model and at the modular model The area contained in the zoom window will now fill the whole screen To return to the previous display area prior to the zoom press END To use the zoom again just press Z and proceed as before To quit the ZOOM function and return to the graphic representation press END Chapter 5 Section Page AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS INTRODUCTION 5 5 1 4 EXECUTION When selecting the automatic mode Cycle it is possible to execute an automatic operation from beginning to end or one pass at a time by pressing To de select this mode and return to the standard execution mode press again Once the desired execution mode has been selected press The CNC assumes the selected machining values F S T as well as the spindle turning direction and it executes the automatic operation following these steps l 2 3 4 The CNC starts the spindle with the set spindle speed S and turning direction If the execution of the automatic operation has been programmed with a new tool T the CNC will move the axes to the tool change position if the machine so requires When the tool is changed
19. Chapter 6 Section Page PROFILES AUTOMATIC MODE 13 CYCLE e WORKING WITH PART PROGRAMS The 800T CNC can store up to 10 part programs Each of these programs may have up to 20 basic operations Each of these operations will have been edited by the operator in the AUTOMATIC mode CYCLE and in the manner described in the chapter about AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS 7 1 ACCESS TO THE PART PROGRAM TABLE To access this table press RECALL The upper right hand side of the screen will show a directory of up to 7 part programs of the 10 that may be stored always numbered with 5 digits and comprised between 00000 and 99995 To see the rest use o The dashes indicate that there is no part program The symbols displayed to the right of the corresponding part number mean the following PART Indicates that the part program has been previously 01435 edited and it contains data 47632 Indicates that the part program contains no data 32540 To assign a number to the desired part proceed as follows Position the cursor over it using the o keys and knowing that the selection rolls over Press P The selected line will appear in reverse video blinking the number 00000 Press the digits of the number to be assigned and then press ENTER If after pressing this key this number keeps blinking 1t means that this number has already been assigned to another part If CLEAR is
20. Once all machine parameters have been set the Jog with Master Handwheel input pin 11 of I O 1 must be used to enable or disable the Jog with Master Handwheel feature Parameter P622 6 Pin 11 1 01 Jog with Master Handwheel P622 6 2 0 Feature not available P622 6 21 Pin 11 at OVdc Feature disabled P622 6 1 Pin 11 at 24Vdc Feature enabled Basic Operation P622 6 1 039 1 a b c When the machine is stopped Only the first handwheel is enabled the second one Master is disabled Therefore only the X axis may be jogged with the handwheels When the machine is running CNC in Execution The axes do not start moving until the Master Handwheel is turned The axis feedrate depends on the turning speed of the Master Handwheel If it stops the axes also stop If the Master Handwheel is turned in the opposite direction the axes also invert their moving direction Return Function for one block only The Jog with Master Handwheel feature may be used with any type of execution be it a cycle an ISO coded program a Chamfer etc Usually with the CNC in execution the first handwheel is disabled except for the semi automatic mode of the automatic operations Taper Turning and Rounding On both Semi automatic operations the Master Handwheel controls the feedrate of the tool path and the First Handwheel will move the X axis Jog with Master Handwheel feature disabled P622 6 1
21. The CNC considers P134 and P135 if the manufacturer has not set a tool change position General concepts 1 The machining conditions feedrate spindle speed etc must be programmed before calling the cycle 2 These parameters must be programmed in the block before the one calling the cycle N2 F10 S1000 M03 N4 P100 K P101 K P102 K P4 K P6 K P7 K P10 K P18 K P19 K P20 K N6 G67 N2 3 The canned cycle does not alter the call parameters P22 P23 and P26 which may be used in later cycles However itdoes modify the values of the basic parameters defining the cycle 4 The basic operation is described in detail in the Operating manual 5 The exit conditions are GOO and G90 Chapter 8 Section Page MACHINING CANNED CYCLES TAPER TURNING 7 G67 N2 8 4 THREADCUTTING CANNED CYCLE G67 N3 X4 Safety distance teu rA on Z Safety distance on X distance i Thread exit Basic parameters defining a cycle P100 X coordinate of the BEGIN point in the selected units in radius or diameter P101 Z coordinate of the BEGIN point P102 X coordinate of the END point in the selected units in radius or diameter P103 Z coordinate of the END point P4 Threading pass D It must have a positive radius value If programmed with a 0 value the CNC will issue the corresponding error The depth of each pass is a function of the corresponding pass number D Vn a
22. Using P99994 is recommended when several user defined programs P99996 are being utilized This way if P99994 contains all the usual subroutines they will not have to be repeated in each P99996 program When having a subroutine associated to a tool machine parameter P730 it is recommended to store that subroutine in program P99994 Chapter 9 Section Page SUBROUTINES 1 9 2 IDENTIFICATION OF A STANDARD SUBROUTINE G22 A standard subroutine not parametric always starts with a block containing function G22 The structure of this block is N4 G22 N2 NA Block number G22 Defines the beginning of the subroutine N2 Identifies the subroutine number between NO and N99 This block cannot contain any additional information Program all the desired blocks after this first subroutine block and remember that a standard subroutine may also contain parametric blocks A subroutine must always end with a block of the type N4 G24 This G24 code indicates the end of the subroutine This block cannot contain any other information Programming example NO G22 N25 NIO X20 N15 PO PO Fl Pl N20 G24 Atention Subroutines N91 through N99 may not be defined because they are utilized by the CNC The CNC memory may not contain two standard subroutines with identical ID numbers even if they belong to different programs However it is possible to use the same number to identify a standard subroutine and a para
23. Absolute coordinates Incremental coordinates Xd 50 N100 G90 X70 Z30 35 N110 X100 Z10 30 N100 G91 X10 Z 40 N110 X30 Z 20 MPT59 e Chapter 2 Section Page COORDINATE PROGRAMMING CARTESIAN 3 COORDINATES 2 3 2 POLAR COORDINATES The format to define a particular point is In mm R 4 3 A 3 3 Ininches R 3 4 A 3 3 Where R is the radius value and A is the angle with respect to the polar origin A is always given in degrees On power up after an M02 M30 EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC assumes point XO ZO as polar origin This polar origin may be changed by programming function G93 The R and A values will be either absolute or incremental depending on whether G90 or G91 has been programmed Positive values do not require the sign Leading zeros as well as trailing decimal zeros may also be omitted 0010 100 10 1 When programming rapid moves G00 or linear interpolations R and A must be programmed When programming circular interpolations G02 or G03 the A 3 3 of the arc s end point and the coordinates of the arc center with respect to the starting point must be programmed X Tel In the case of a circular interpolation G02 or G03 when working in polar coordinates the center of the arc must be defined by means of I K like when using cartesian coordinates MPT60 Z When programming a circular interpolation with G02 G03 the CNC assum
24. IIS NS SSMS MHF ees ec m ERN SS SMITA PNM IRE NSS SMM LWA NVM BEGIN X48 ZO ZA 46 ZF Z 45 T ficu n L Hu es sm YS een ever ys MRS l l l l I BICI TTL whee l l uoc eic mA Lm cy l l FANS SMM NN e AXIS NS SMA NN a OS SAA NSS S MAA MAA Page Chapter 8 Section 18 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES EXAMPLE 3 AUX X12 ZO ZA X12 Z 30 ZF 20 X 1 Z T 4 AUX GA ZF X 1 Z 26 25 1 Chapter 8 Section Page PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES EXAMPLE 3 19 ARAS A p AAAA 7 KA BEGIN DAS DeL nn AGAR AAA Lu HA ppp pp gg lg 3 N N SN MN DO S PA SIR 4 LA A ZZ DAZ ZA 4414 AS 4 Gt Y SAA Y Za A Z FOIS BEGIN END M re NS SSSSSNSSSSSSSNISNN SS SOMOS NHN iuo ASS S MWAH PHM R 01 al at HUA Y IN 111111141104 IGA A ppp P ggg ggg lg lag Pg apo lg T Ly Ys 43473373 BEGIN ZA 3277744 NN SN ANN NN NN N X NN SSS NY ESS N NS WAY SON SS s 3 SAT BONS Y TARA TAS 22 7 77 ae Sita A Y P Wn 1 1 A A B i AT A E T ON ISSO SI O OSOS NS AAD SYS SAAT SEMA NS NSS SMALE END R QA al aT A H T F CSS BEGIN X40
25. Part Zero This new origin point is chosen freely by the operator and the position values shown by the CNC are referred to this point Bear in mind that to select the Part Zero the CNC must be working in absolute coordinates lamp off If it is not off press its key The Part Zero stays selected even when the CNC is off and it will be lost when a new Part Zero is selected or when the Machine Reference Zero home is searched 1 4 1 HOME SEARCH The Machine Reference Zero search is done one axis at a time by following these steps Press the key corresponding to the axis to be homed X Z and then the up arrow key The editing window will request confirmation of the command Press the key for the CNC to perform the home search on that axis If the home search is not desired press any other key To cancel the home search once in progress press CLEAR When doing a home search the CNC initializes the displays of the axis and it cancels the Part Zero that was selected Chapter 1 Section Page CONCEPTS REFERENCE SYSTEMS 9 1 4 2 ZERO PRESET It is possible to preset the desired Part Zero in order to use the coordinates relative to the blue prints of the workpiece without having to modify the various points of the part To preset the Part Zero follow these steps The CNC must be working in absolute coordinates lamp off If it is not off press its key Press the key corresponding to the axis t
26. different X coordinates or longitudinal slots parallel to the center line on the cylindrical side of the part same X different Z coordinates This feature requires spindle orientation and live tool If the CNC lacks both features it will not display this canned cycle A full description of these cycles can be found in the chapter on Automatic Operations of this manual To quit the editing or execution of these cycles press any other operation key or LEVE n nc Press Or to return to the Other automatic operations menu and then press or again to return to the DRO mode Chapter 3 Section Page AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS 11 3 AUXILIARY MODES When selecting this option the CNC shows the following menu 1 SPECIAL MODES 2 PERIPHERALS 3 LOCK UNLOCK 4 PROGRAM 99996 EXECUTION 5 EDITING PROGRAM 99996 When selecting the Special Modes option the CNC requests the password or manufacturer s access code indicated in the installation manual After accessing one of these modes and operate with it press END to quit At this point the CNC will show this menu again Press END once more to return to the standard display mode Page Chapter 3 Section 12 AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS AUXILIARY MODES 3 8 PERIPHERALS With this CNC it is possible to communicate with the FAGOR Floppy Disk Unit with a general peripheral device or with a computer in order to t
27. 1 EXAMPLE 1 WwW ES e co X e e e e q D 9 8g M E 45 e S ry las X ae ee 2 15 Uri 2 27 1a45 66 x 70 85 98 125 al 135 el 155 al T1 Te T3 Chapter 8 Section Page PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES EXAMPLE 1 3 i eel teils euin EL NNNSNN Y N T gg Amny BEGIN X44 Z 135 ZA 38 ZF A X 1 N Z 136 135 1 76 15 T T 1 F _ 44 38 2 Css 155 135 Page Chapter 8 Section 4 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES EXAMPLE 1 EID BEGIN X38 Z 125 3 R A N T F C 76A 76 X 1 Z 126 li i ce lI o d H E og 1 n ues El b BEGIN X32 Z 124 ZA R 1 ZF A X 1 N Z 126 T 1 T F CSS Chapter 8 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES Section EXAMPLE 1 Page Y Y BEGIN X30 Z 98 ZA 28 RE A X 1 N Z 99 Q 45 T T 1 F CSS N gt P4 BEGIN x28 Z 70 ZA 24 ZF A X 1 N Z 71 Q 45 T T 1 F CSS Page Chapter 8 Section 6 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES EXAMPLE 1 E 5 BEGIN X24 Z 27 19 A N 76 6 41 T 1 F CSS l p wer ddd AUX ZA ZF X 1 Z 28 T _ 24 19 2 66 27 AUX BEGIN X19 ZO 76 END X19 Z 27 ZF 17 X 1 A Z 1 N T T 1 F CSS Chapter 8 Section Page PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES EXAMPLE 1 7 BEGIN X17 ZO ZA END X17 Z 1
28. 13 4 where N4 Block number G33 Threading code X Final X coordinate of the thread I Thread pitch along the X axis The X coordinate will be either absolute or incremental depending on whether in G90 or G91 Taper threading Its programming format is N4 G33 X 4 3 Z 4 3 13 4 K3 4 where N4 Block number G33 Threading code X Final X coordinate of the thread Z Final Z coordinate of the thread K Thread pitch along the Z axis I Thread pitch along the X axis The X and Z coordinate will be either absolute or incremental depending on whether in G90 or G91 On taper threading it suffices to program the threading pith along one axis since the CNC calculates the pitch along the other axis In other words it may be programmed like this N4 G33 X 4 3 Z 4 3 I3 4 or like this N4 G33 X 4 3 Z 4 3 K3 4 Nevertheless both pitches I K may be programmed in order to obtain taper threads with multiple pitches different from the ones the CNC would calculate Atention The threading operation must begin away from the part with the tool cutting air in order to avoid possible problems originated when the axes start moving Page Chapter 6 Section 4 ADDITIONAL PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS aaa A 6 4 1 EXAMPLES a Longitudinal threading 2mm deep cylindrical thread with a 5mm pitch The current tool position is X60 Z60 X in radius Absolute coordinates NO G00 G90 X18 Z53 N5 G33 Z7 K5 N10 G00 X6
29. 15 2 X20 ZO Z X20 Z 10 1 X 15 0 613 Z T Page 22 Chapter 8 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES EXAMPLE 3 Section EXAMPLE 4 N T1 T2 T3 T4 Chapter 8 Section Page PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES EXAMPLE 4 23 r crTr I Fg TESTA E Pao d epus oscar cm qr pev eG Sepe rt 1 Eur PE e ss 1 li l T l I u Hn T NE i P 4 4 l 4 H H tH 4H I 11 i H pl 1 AE 1 z m i Le Em n y EMI BAN std ie owed Sort ee LJ ni Ms ee 1 Fg n 1 rat TURN I bat n irr cod 1 pog 4 T l pancho es sd 1 pog 1 1 N i i i P m pl lor een ON Lia ando P2 X17 Z 1 7 P3 X17 Z 20 5 t d n AUX P4 X18 5 Z 20 5 P5 X18 5 Z 30 H 17 ZA P6 X23 5 Z 30 A ZF P7 X28 Z 47 aT 5 X 20 P8 X28 Z 80 T 1 Z 23 P9 X33 Z 82 5 F T P10 X33 Z 102 CSS P11 X48 Z 102 P12 X48 Z 102 Page Chapter 8 Section 24 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES EXAMPLE 4 Y H 7 ZA A ZF aT 5 X 28 T 1 Z 24 F T CSS EX BEGIN END P1 X35 P2 X35 P3 X38 P4 X38 P5 X44 P6 X44 P7 X45 P8 X45 P9 X48 P10 X48 P11 X48 P12 X48 Z 102 Z 140 Z 140 Z 180 Z 190 Z 195 Z 195 Z 210 Z 210 Z 210 Z 210 Z 210 BEGIN X35 Z 116 ZA END X26 Z 162 ZF R 6 X 12 Q 204 24 180 Z 14 al 17
30. 2 to 3 but in rapid from point 0 to point 1 and from 3 to 0 The exit conditions of the cycle are GOO and G90 4 If the position of the tool is not correct to execute the cycle error 4 will be issued If it is correct a prior horizontal turning will be carried out if necessary 5 Ifthere is a finishing pass the cycle will be completed on the starting position of the tool 0 Otherwise the cycle will end on point F 6 Ifthelastmovement prior to calling the canned cycle G81 has been executed in GOO tool radius compensation G41 G42 can be used Otherwise error 35 will be issued Chapter 8 Section Page MACHINING CANNED CYCLES TURNING WITH STRAIGHT 33 SECTIONS G81 8 14 FACING CANNED CYCLE WITH STRAIGHT SECTIONS G82 P0 P1 P2 P3 P5 P7 P8 P9 F ocu TS lj po P7 a N N Tl X 2 3 Z E Pg m P8 al Format N4 G82 P0 K P1 K P2 K P3 K P5 K P7 K P8 K P9 K Parameter meaning X coordinate value of point A radius or diameter Z coordinate value of point A X coordinate value of point B radius or diameter Z coordinate value of point B Max step It must be greater than zero or error 3 will be one displayed The real step calculated by the CNC will be smaller than or equal to the max step Finishing stock allowance on the X axis It must be greater or equal to ze
31. 25 30 Protocol Manual PLCI Manual DNC PLC Manual FLOPPY DISK Manual Introduction 6 FOR THE 800T CNC Is directed to the machine builder or person in charge of installing and starting up the CNC It has the Installation manual inside Sometimes it may contain an additional manual describing New Software Features recently implemented Is directed to the end user or CNC operator It contains 2 manuals Operating Manual describing how to operate the CNC Programming Manual describing how to program the CNC Sometimes it may contain an additional manual describing New Software Features recently implemented Is directed to people using the optional DNC communications software Is directed to people wishing to design their own DNC communications software to communicate with the 800 without using the DNC25 30 software To be used when the CNC has an integrated PLC Is directed to the machine builder or person in charge of installing and starting up the PLCI Is directed to people using the optional communications software DNC PLC Is directed to people using the Fagor Floppy Disk Unit and it shows how to use it MANUAL CONTENTS The programming manual consists of the following sections Index Comparative Table for Fagor 800T CNC models New Features and modifications Introduction Summary of safety conditions Material returning conditions Fagor documents for the 800T CNC Manual Contents Chapter 1 Program writ
32. 3 will be issued Page Chapter 8 Section 20 MACHINING CANNED CYCLES eee conc es P12 P13 P14 Cutter angle Its value must be comprised between 0 degrees and 90 degrees or error 3 will be issued If it is equal or smaller than 45 degree P4 will be taken as residual stock on the X axis and P5 as max step along X axis 45 MPT73 Ifitis greaterthan 45 degree P4 will be taken as residual stock on the Z axis and P5 as max step along Z axis 43 a EN NM MPT74 Number of the first block to define the pattern Number of the last block to define the pattern Chapter 8 Section Page MACHINING CANNED CYCLES Teer 21 The following points should be borne in mind when programming this canned cycle 10 11 12 The definition ofthe pattern must not include point A because itis identified by PO and P1 The machining conditions feedrate spindle rotation etc must be programmed before calling the cycle The parameters must be entered either in the cycle calling block or in previous blocks This canned cycle does not alter the call parameters which may be used in later cycles However it does modify the values of parameters P70 through P99 The exit conditions of the cycle are GOO and G90 The pattern can be made up by straight lines arcs roundings tangential entries tangential exits and chamfers Absolute or incremental pr
33. 4 Section Page MISCELLANEOUS ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS FUNCTIONS M 11 5 1 ROUND CORNER G05 5 PATH CONTROL When operating in G05 the CNC starts executing the next block of the program as soon as the axes start decelerating to reach the target position programmed in the previous block Therefore the movements programmed in the next block are executed before the axes reach their target position programmed in the previous block Example X programmed in diameter Starting point X40 Z50 N100 G90 G01 G05 X80 N110 Z20 As seen in the example the corners appear rounded The difference between the theoretical path and the real one depends on the actual axis feedrate The greater the feedrate the greater the Xd N 110 TT a UN lt q N 100 20 E l z 20 50 Z difference is between the theoretical and real paths greater radius Function G05 is modal and incompatible with G07 Function G05 may also be programmed as G5 5 2 SQUARE CORNER G07 When operating in G07 the CNC starts executing the next block of the program once the axes have reached their target position programmed in the previous block Example X axis programmed in diameter Starting point X40 Z50 N100 G90 G01 G07 X80 N110 Z20 The theoretical and real path are the same Function G07 is modal and incompatible with x N 110 40 N 100 MPTO08 G05
34. COMPENSATION 7 3 MPT40 TEMPORARY TOOL RADIUS CANCELLATION WITH G00 When switching from G01 G02 or G03 to GOO the tool stays tangent to the perpendicular at the end of the movement programmed in the block containing G01 G02 or G03 The same thing happens when programming a block containing G40 but without movement data The following movements in G00 are carried out without radius compensation When switching from G00 to G01 G02 or G03 tool radius compensation is reactivated Special case If the CNC does not have enough data for compensating but the movement is in GOO it will execute it without radius compensation Chapter 7 Section Page TEMPORARY TOO COMPRA ION CANCELLATION WITH G00 x 7 4 CANCELLATION OF TOOL RADIUS COMPENSATION G40 Tool radius compensation is canceled by function G40 Bear in mind that G40 can only be programmed in a linear motion block G00 or G01 If G40 is programmed in a circular motion block G02 or G03 the CNC will issue error 8 The next drawings show the different cancellation cases Compensated path T C a Programmed path T P Page Chapter 7 Section CANCELING TOOL RADIUS 10 TOOL COMPENSATION COMPENSATION G40 Programmed path T P Compensated path T C Chapter 7 Section Page TOOL COMPENSATION CANCELING TOOL RADIUS 11 COMPENSATION G40 9 e MAC
35. CYCLE The profile in automatic mode has the following parameters associated to it finishing pass finishing feedrate finishing tool and safety distances along X and Z To define them press AUX and operate as described in the section on Cycle finishing pass and safety distance of the chapter on Auxiliary Functions in this manual For outside machining the safety distance along X must be positive X and negative X for inside machining It must be borne in mind that in order to obtain a proper part finish the CNC applies the tool radius compensation while machining the profile Therefore it is necessary to indicate on the tool offset table the cutter radius and the location code shape of the tool to be used for this operation Chapter 6 Section Page PROFILES AUTOMATIC MODE 7 CYCLE The information shown at the main window when selecting the automatic mode CYCLE is the following When operating in Constant Surface Speed F CSS MAX T When not operating in Constant Surface Speed F CSS T To change operating modes press CSS The meaning of each one of these fields is F Currently selected axis feedrate Currently applied override to the programmed axis feedrate F CSS Constant Surface Speed to execute the cycle RPM Spindle speed to execute the cycle In either operating mode RPM or CSS both values are the ones currently selected to execute the cycle and the S value s
36. E Z 3 4 Every threading pass is performed as indicated in the illustration The Z axis movement is synchronized with the spindle in such a way that all the threading passes always start at the same point X4 Safety distance on Z Safety distance on X 5 Once the roughing operation of the thread has concluded if X is other than 0 the last roughing pass is repeated 6 The tool returns to the cycle calling point 7 The CNC stops the spindle Page Chapter 5 Section 34 AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS THREADING 5 7 GROOVING This operation is selected by pressing CL m GIN PM d Y rra l I 4 4 I l l l 8050701 The CNC shows the BEGIN and END values currently selected and they may be changed if so desired The calibrated tool end must be considered when setting the BEGIN and END points since the Z axis movements will finish when the calibrated end of the tool reaches that point The following data must also be defined o A TW Indicates the final diameter or final depth to be obtained with the grooving operation Defines the grooving step If programmed with a value of 0 the CNC will take the N value into account Defines the number of grooving passes This parameter will be taken into account when A 0 If both the A and N are programmed with a 0 value the CNC will issue the corresponding error message Indicates the tool width
37. It indicates the distance along the X axis and with respect to the BEGIN point where the tool will be positioned in the approach move Safety distance along the Z axis for automatic operations It indicates the distance along the Z axis and with respect to the BEGIN point where the tool will be positioned in the approach move Every time one of these options is selected the CNC will highlight it Also at the bottom of the screen the CNC will request the new value to be assigned to that parameter After defining the new value press ENTER in order for the CNC to assume it Page Chapter 3 Section 10 AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS CYCLE FINISHING PASS 3 6 OTHER AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS When pressing and selecting the option 6 corresponding to OTHER CYCLES or in DRO mode or at the compact model is pressed the CNC will show the following machining cycles SIMPLE DRILLING TAPPING Consisting in drilling the face of the part only along its turning axis center line MULTIPLE DRILLING With this cycle it is possible to drill concentric holes on the face of the part along the Z axis as well as radial holes on its cylindrical side along the X axis Z Lv WY This feature requires spindle orientation and live tool If the CNC lacks both features it will not display this canned cycle SLOT MILLING With this cycle it is possible to mill radial slots on the face of a part same Z
38. M19 S4 3 is programmed the spindle will rotate at the speed and direction set by machine parameters P606 2 and P706 and will stop at the point identified by 4 3 in degrees referred to the machine reference zero home When the spindle is positioned within the dead band P707 the CNC sends out the spindle locking signal decoded M15 and the spindle is kept in closed loop applying the gain as per P708 min and an analog voltage as per P709 When programming in a block M19 S4 3 more information is not allowed in that block M20 END OF PART PROGRAM EXECUTION This code indicates that the part execution has ended For example on a machine with a bar feeder the PLC could control the machining of several parts in a row by using this function M41 M42 M43 M44 SPINDLE RANGE SELECTION If P601 1 1 these codes are automatically generated by the CNC when an S function is programmed If this parameter is set to 0 M41 M42 M43 and M44 must be programmed When operating at constant surface speed G96 these functions must necessarily be programmed even if P601 1 is set to 1 M45 SELECTION OF ROTATION SPEED OF THE LIVE TOOL Programming format N4 M45 S 4 S 4 defines the direction and rotation speed of the live tool The sign defines the direction of turn With S44 it will turn in one direction and with S 4 will turn in the opposite direction The programmable value range is between S0 and S9999 0 9999 rpm Chapter
39. Master Handwheel When stopping the Master Handwheel the execution is interrupted When turning the Master handwheel again execution is resumed When turning the Master Handwheel in the opposite direction the operation is over A new turn of the Master Handwheel in any direction implies the execution of a new operation in the indicated direction 24 Jj SOFTWARE VERSION OF THE CNC From this version on when accessing the EPROM checksum screen Auxiliary Modes Special Modes 8 The CNC will show the checksum of each EPROM and the Software version of the CNC For example Version 6 1 Version 6 4 May 1997 1 TOOL CHANGE INDICATOR FOR THE PLC 197 On machines with a manual tool changer when the CNC detects that the tool must be changed it interrupts the execution and it displays a message for the operator to proceed with the tool change Certain precautions must be taken sometimes when changing tools Those conditions must be handled by the PLC Therefore from this version on when the CNC displays the tool change warning message it also activates the PLC input I97 and it cancels it when the message is removed Version 6 6 November 1997 1 HANDLING FEEDBACK SYSTEMS WITH CODED Io semi absolute Machine parameters P608 5 P608 8 Type of Home marker signal of the feedback system X Z axes 0 2 normal Io 1 coded Io P608 3 P608 6 Period of the coded Io signal X Z signal 0 20mm Period 1 10
40. P17x 8 F4 Division N4 P8 P7 F4 P35 P8 P7 P35 N4 P8 P2 F4 K5 P8 P2 5 N4 P8 P8 F4 K2 P8 P8 2 F5 Square root N4 PIS F5 P23 eonun P15 V P23 N4 P14 F5 K9 P14 V9 N4 P18 F5 P18 P18 V P18 F6 Square root of the sum of squares N4 P60 P2 F6 P3 P60 V P22 P32 N4 P50 P40 F6 KS P50 V_P40 5 N4 P P1 F6 KA P Pl 42 F7 Sine N4 P1 F7 K5 uie P1 Sine 5 degrees INASP SPs ee cs P1 Sine P2 The angle P2 must be given in degrees FS Cosine NA P1 2FS8P2 P1 Cosine P2 N4 P1 F8 K75 P1 Cosine 75 degrees Chapter 10 Section Page PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING OPERATORS 3 F1 through F16 F9 Tangent N4 P1 F9 P2 coated Pl tg P2 N5 P1 E9 K505 etes P1 tg 30 degrees F10 Arc tangent N4 P1 F10 P2 Soest P1 arc tg P2 result in degrees N4 P1 FIOKO S P1 arc tg 0 5 F11 Comparison It compares one parameter with another one or with a constant and it activates the conditional jump flags its usefulness will be described in the section on conditional jumps G26 G27 G28 G29 NA P1 F11 P2 If P1 P2 the if zero flag is activated If P1 gt P2 the if equal to or greater than flag is activated If P1 lt P2 the if smaller than flag is activated It may also be programmed as N
41. P621 6 Counting direction of the Master Handwheel P621 3 Feedback units of the Master Handwheel P621 1 2 Feedback resolution of the Master Handwheel P621 5 Feedback multiplying factor for the Master Handwheel Selection a CNC Models SOOTI and 800TGI From the PLCI Once all machine parameters have been set PLCI output O39 must be used to enable or disable the Jog with Master Handwheel feature Parameter P622 6 PLCI output O39 Jog with Master Hand wheel P622 6 2 0 Feature not available P622 6 21 Feature disabled P622 6 1 Feature enabled b CNC Models 800T and SOOTG Using pin 11 of connector I O 1 Once all machine parameters have been set the Jog with Master Handwheel input pin 11 of I O 1 must be used to enable or disable the Jog with Master Handwheel feature Parameter P622 6 Pin 11 1 01 Jog with Master Hand wheel P622 6 2 0 Feature not available P622 6 21 Pin 11 at OVdc Feature disabled P622 6 1 Pin 11 at 24Vdc Feature enabled Basic Operation P622 6 1 O39 1 a When the machine is stopped Only the first handwheel is enabled the second one Master is disabled Therefore only the X axis may be jogged with the handwheels b When the machine is running CNC in Execution The axes do not start moving until the Master Handwheel is turned The axis feedrate depends on the turning speed of the Master Handwheel If it stops the axes al
42. R 3 4 A 4 3 in inches N4 Block number G08 Code for the arc tangent to previous path R Radius with respect to the polar origin of the arc s end point A Angle with respect to the polar origin of the arc s end point Example X axis programmed in diameter Being PO X40 Z70 the starting point a straight line followed by an arc tangent to it and another arc tangent to the previous arc would be programmed as follows N110 G90 G01 Z50 N120 G08 X80 Z30 XA N130 G08 X110 Z15 zeli Since both arcs are tangential it is not necessary to program their center ol coordinates I K Without using G08 the program looks like this 20 N 10 Po N110 G90 G01 Z50 N120 G02 X80 Z30 120 KO N130 G03 X110 Z15 I0 K 15 MPT09 G08 is not modal it only replaces G02 and GO3 in the block containing it It may be programmed whenever a tangential arc is desired The previous path may be straight line or another arc Atention G08 cannot be used to draw a complete circle since there are infinite solutions The CNC will issue error 47 when attempting to do so Chapter 5 Section Page ARC TANGENT TO PNPECONDSOE PREVIOUS PATH G08 D 5 7 ARC DEFINED BY THREE POINTS G09 By means of function G09 it is possible to program an arc by defining the end point and an intermediate point the starting point is the end point of the previous block or the current position of the axes In other wor
43. arithmetic parameter contents setting them to 0 Automatic rounding operation Cycle level with angle other than 90 Automatic grooving operation on the face of the part and finishing pass Automatic profile rounding operation by pattern repeat of profile or roughing Approach point in profile rounding operation modification Automatic Profile execution Cycle Level by pattern repeat or roughing Approach point in automatic Profile execution modification Automatic tapping operation M20 at the end of part program execution Graphic simulation Execution Simulation of program P99996 ISO coded user program Automatic or Single block execution of P99996 Editing of program P99996 ISO coded user program P99994 to store subroutines Subroutine associated to the execution of a tool only when executing program P99996 ISO codes of the 800T CNC AFFECTED MANUAL AND SECTION Installation Manual Installation Manual PLCI Manual Installation Manual Operating Manual Operating Manual Operating Manual Operating Manual Operating Manual Operating Manual Operating Manual Operating Manual Installation Manual Operating Manual Installation Manual Operating Manual Operating Manual Installation Manual Operating Manual Programming Manual Programming Manual Installation Manual Programming Manual Programming Manual Section 6 4 Section 4 3 2 Section 3 10 Section 3 9 amp 7 9 Section 5
44. at the beginning of the profile BEGIN point as well as at its exit END point Chapter 5 Section Page AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS ROUNDING 29 5 Once the roughing operation has concluded the CNC runs the finishing pass as indicated below and the rounding operation will end at the cycle calling point The feedrate for the finishing pass is defined by the current of the programmed feedrate If the cycle does not have a finishing pass the tool will move to the cycle calling point after running the last roughing pass 6 The CNC stops the spindle Atention It must be borne in mind that the CNC applies tool radius compensation on the last pass or finishing pass in order to obtain the proper part finish It is necessary to indicate on the tool offset table the cutter tip radius value as well as the location code tool shape of the tool to machine with When only a single pass is desired program A H and parameters A 0 and F 0 Page Chapter 5 Section 30 AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS ROUNDING 5 6 THREADING With this option it is possible to make a thread along the Z axis Press to select this option 5 6 1 SEMI AUTOMATIC THREADING P 8050601 It uses the BEGIN and END values The CNC displays the currently selected values and new ones may be set if so desired It is also necessary to define P corresponding to the pitch of the thread The right han
45. at A as well When executing the block the F feedrate speed cannot be altered by turning the FEEDRATE knob whose value will be set at 100 Chapter 8 Section Page LONGITUDINAL MACHINING CANNED CYCLES THREADCUTTING G86 41 9 SUBROUTINES A subroutine is a section of a program which properly identified may be called upon to be executed from any position block of the program A subroutine may be called upon several times from different program positions or from different programs With a single call the subroutine may be executed up to 255 times A subroutine may be included within the user defined program P99996 or may be stored in the special program P99994 for user defined subroutines Standard and parametric subroutines are basically identical Their only difference being that the calling block for a parametric subroutine G21 N2 2 may contain up to 15 definition parameters In the case ofa standard subroutine the parameters may not be defined in the calling block The maximum number of parameters of a standard or parametric subroutine is 255 PO through P254 9 1 SPECIAL PROGRAM P99994 FOR USER SUBROUTINES Program P99994 must be edited at a PC and sent out to the CNC It cannot be modified at the CNC It must only contain the user defined subroutines edited in ISO code When program P99996 calls upon a subroutine the CNC looks for it in P99996 first and then if not found in P99994
46. axis must be equal or greater than P8 To avoid passes that are too thin or generating error 31 when operating with tool compensation the value of this distance from 0 to B should be equal to P8 N P5 N being an entire number The distance between the starting point O and the point A along the X axis should be higher than P7 The machining conditions feedrate spindle rotation must be programmed before calling the cycle The parameters can be programmed either in the cycle calling block or in previous blocks This canned cycle does not alter the call parameters which may be used in later cycles However it does modify the values of parameters P70 through P99 The movements of the elementary work cycle see drawing are carried out as follows At the programmed feedrate from point 1 to point 2 and from 2 to 3 butin rapid from point 0 to point 1 and from 3 to 0 The exit conditions are G00 and G90 If the position of the tool is not correct to execute the cycle error 4 will be issued If it is correct a prior vertical facing will be carried out if necessary If there is a finishing pass the cycle will be completed on the tool s starting position 0 If there is no finishing pass the cycle will end a point F If the last movement prior to calling the canned cycle has been executed in G00 tool radius compensation G41 G42 can be used Otherwise error 35 will be issued Chapter 8 Sect
47. backlash is the difference between both graphs Backlash Positive direction Position i z z Negative direction When leadscrew error compensation is not to be used all the values of one of the tables must be set to 0 thus the other graph will correspond to the leadscrew backlash Backlash Positive direction c Position Negative direction Notes Both graphs must meet all the requirements of the leadscrew error compensation tables One of these requirements states that the Machine Reference Zero home must be assigned an error of 0 Iftheleadscrew has some backlash atthis Machine Reference Zero point that amount of backlash must be allocated to machine parameter P109 or P309 Backlash for the X axis or Z axis and all the remaining points ofthe table must be offset by that amount Example Backlash Position Negative direction Backlash Position Operation When using Variable Backlash Compensation the CNC operates with leadscrew error compensation and therefore it applies at all times the backlash compensation set in the table for that point and in the machining direction When the axis movement is reversed the CNC swaps graphs restoring or applying the amount of backlash compensation and direction corresponding to that point Version 5 7 July 1996 1 WORK ZONE EXCLUSION ZONE DETECTION When using this feature the CNC prevents the axe
48. error compensation table to a peripheral device The lower right hand side of the CNC screen will show a directory of up to 7 part programs of the 10 that may be stored To see the rest of them use s To do this key in the desired number when the CNC requests the number of the program to be transferred and press ENTER P00000 to P99990 Corresponding to part programs P99994 to P99996 Special ISO coded user program P99997 For internal use and CANNOT be transmitted back and forth P99998 Used to associate texts to PLC messages P99999 Machine parameters and tables Important note The part programs cannot be edited at the peripheral device or computer The CRT will show the message RECEIVING or SENDING during the program transfer and the message PROGRAM NUM P23256 for example RECEIVED or SENT when the transmission is completed Chapter 7 Section Page WORKING WITH PART PROGRAMS PERIPHERALS 11 When the transmission is not correct it will display the message Transmission error and when the data received by the CNC is not recognized different format by the CNC it will issue the message Incorrect data received The CNC memory must be unlocked in order to perform any data transmission if not so the CNC will return to the menu of the peripheral mode When transmitting from a peripheral device other than a FAGOR Floppy Disk Unit the following aspects must be considered The program must
49. feedback reversal JOG movements also in mm rev Handwheel governed by the PLCI Spindle inhibit from PLCI Clear all arithmetic parameter contents setting them to 0 Automatic rounding operation Cycle level with angle other than 90 Automatic grooving operation on the face of the part and finishing pass Automatic profile rounding operation by pattern repeat of profile or roughing Approach point in profile rounding operation modification Automatic Profile execution Cycle Level by pattern repeat or roughing Approach point in automatic Profile execution modification Automatic tapping operation M20 at the end of part program execution Graphic simulation Execution Simulation of program P99996 ISO coded user program Automatic or Single block execution of P99996 Editing of program P99996 ISO coded user program P99994 to store subroutines Subroutine associated to the execution of a tool only when executing program P99996 ISO codes of the 800T CNC AFFECTED MANUAL AND SECTION Installation Manual Installation Manual PLCI Manual Installation Manual Operating Manual Operating Manual Operating Manual Operating Manual Operating Manual Operating Manual Operating Manual Operating Manual Installation Manual Operating Manual Installation Manual Operating Manual Operating Manual Installation Manual Operating Manual Programming Manual Programming Manual Installation Manual Pr
50. in the LAN For example The PLC64 program is not compiled gt A G52 type block has been sent to an 82CNC while it was in execution FAGOR LAN error An incorrect command has been sent out to a node Watch dog error in the periodic module This error occurs when the periodic module takes longer than 5 milliseconds Watch dog error in the main module This error occurs when the main module takes longer than half the time indicated in machine parameter P729 The internal CNC information requested by activating marks M1901 thru M1949 is not available An attempt has been made to modify an unavailable internal CNC variable by means of marks M1950 thru M1964 Error when writing machine parameters the decoded M function table and the leadscrew error compensation tables into the EEPROM memory This error may occur when after locking the machine parameters the decoded M function table and the leadscrew error compensation tables one tries to save this information into the EEPROM memory Checksum error when recovering restoring the machine parameters the decoded M function table and leadscrew error compensation tables from the EEPROM memory Atention The ERRORS indicated with behave as follows They stop the axis feed and the spindle rotation by cancelling the Enable signals and the analog outputs of the CNC They interrupt the execution of the part program of the CNC if it was being executed The ERRORS indi
51. jog keys or the handwheels If attempted to do so during execution the CNC will issue error 67 X Z Limit Error SE NE 4 MANUAL SPINDLE GEAR CHANGERS Operation on previous versions To manually change the spindle speed range gear machine parameter P601 1 had to be set to o When the new selected spindle speed S involved a gear change the CNC displayed a message indicating which range had to be selected The operator had to proceed as follows Ist Stop the spindle 2nd Manually change gears 3rd Restore spindle rotation 4th Press ENTER The CNC resumed program execution Operation on current and future versions To manually change the spindle speed range gear machine parameter P601 1 must set to 0 When the new selected spindle speed S involves a gear change the CNC displays a message indicating which range has to be selected The operator must proceed as follows Ist Manually change gears 2nd Press ENTER The CNC restores spindle rotation and resumes program execution M 5 VARIABLE BACKLASH COMPENSATION Until now the 800T CNC allowed for a single leadscrew backlash compensation From now on it is also possible to compensate for motion reversal backlash depending on the particular backlash areas of the axes Requirements The leadscrew error compensation tables are now used for leadscrew error compensation and for this Variable Backlash Compensation at the same tim
52. mp 20 The CNC will show the BEGIN and END values currently available New ones may be selected if so desired The following data must also be defined P Maximum penetration per peck drilled out material removal a Angular position of first hole A Angular increment between holes N Number of holes to be drilled To set the safety distances along X and Z press the CNC will display a new menu After setting both values press pa or even To quit this operation proceed as follows LEVEL Press or J to return to the Other automatic operations menu Press or E again to return to the DRO mode Page Chapter 5 Section 42 AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS MULTIPLE DRILLING Basic operation dE 3 ds 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Ky Beso p __ L a Move at F mei uu gt Rapid move 7 t r z as Pa I 4 illa lada eeik Minis gt lu A 1 221 2 FOMOUIGS M Does a home search on the spindle if it was in the rpm mode before Makes a tool change if necessary Starts the live tool at the indicated rpm TRPM Orients the spindle to the indicated angular position 00 Positions the axes over the BEGIN point keeping the safety distances Performs the drilling operations in the following steps 6 1 Drill a distance P at the programmed F 6 2 Rapid withdrawal to BEGIN Safety Dista
53. not available An attempt has been made to modify an unavailable internal CNC variable by means of marks M1950 thru M1964 Error when writing machine parameters the decoded M function table and the leadscrew error compensation tables into the EEPROM memory This error may occur when after locking the machine parameters the decoded M function table and the leadscrew error compensation tables one tries to save this information into the EEPROM memory Checksum error when recovering restoring the machine parameters the decoded M function table and leadscrew error compensation tables from the EEPROM memory Atention The ERRORS indicated with behave as follows They stop the axis feed and the spindle rotation by cancelling the Enable signals and the analog outputs of the CNC They interrupt the execution of the part program of the CNC if it was being executed The ERRORS indicated with besides behaving as those with an they activate the INTERNAL EMERGENCY OUTPUT Version 5 2 March 1995 1 P621 4 DIVIDING FACTOR FOR ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL FEEDBACK SIGNALS Machine parameter P621 4 is used with P602 4 and P621 5 which indicate the multiplying factor for the electronic handwheel feedback signals for the 1st and 2nd axis respectively Machine parameter P627 1 indicates whether all handwheel feedback signals are to be divided or not P621 4 0 They are not divided P621 4 1 All handwheel feed
54. once more 7 3 PART PROGRAM EDITIG A part program consists of various operations Therefore to edit it we must edit its different operations Each operation will be edited as any normal operation and in the manner described in the section about AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS However when editing a taper turning rounding or threading operation the or B keys must be used to select the corner to be machined the type of rounding concave or convex the type of thread inside or outside or the type of profile entry exit to be performed All the operations of a part program must be edited in the AUTOMATIC mode CYCLE Once the part program has been selected and the operation has been defined position the cursor over the operation number to be assigned to it and press ENTER to store it in memory Page Chapter 7 Section 2 WORKING WITH PART PROGRAMS SELECT AND EDIT RENE A PART PROGRAM Also if so desired it is possible to execute the operation before entering it in memory and this way check that it works properly When pressing ENTER the CNC requests confirmation of the command The following cases are possible The selected operation number was free Once the command to store in memory is confirmed the CNC will include the new operation in the indicated position and the operation listing will be updated The selected operation number was occupied When the CNC requests confirmation of
55. points forming a parabola The X axis is programmed in diameter The formula for a parabola x p3 AX Z KX P2 Where PO K P4 X P5 Z P1 Z The call parameters are PO K Pl Starting X coordinate p2 Final X coordinate p3 z Increment along X Program N0080 G21 N56 1 PO K0 01 P1 K00 P2 K100 P3 2K1 Call a subroutine N0090 WIS ions reco doeet A RE End of program N0110 G23 N56 won cece e Definition of a subroutine NOT20 PAP Tus mee estrena etae X starting X N0130 P4 P4 F1 P3 P4 F11 P2 Compare new X with final X N0140 G28 N160 eessen If smaller continue at N160 NOISO PASP anne her reo e teer seteit If greater new X final X N0160 P5 P4 F3 P4 P5 P5 F3 PO B5SEITO P5 752 uoi nee Calculate new Z coordinate N0170 G01 XP4 ZPS5 Move to new point X Z NO180 P4 F11 P2 scere Compare new X wih final X NO190 327 NT3 O0 eint cau tret If smaller calculate next point goto N130 N0200 6324 naaa End of subroutine Chapter 10 Section Page PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING JUMP FUNCTIONS 9 G26 G27 G28 G29 EXAMPLE LT ere vee GT X 82N 49 995 8c BEP vv 15 27 ri 66 70 1a45 85 414 44 98 125 135 155 T3 T2 T1 Tot gU dp Epi C NISL ii EN E te Nu EN a see 4 4 d dE dem 4 H Z f n png 1 u e A A ro dbbeqeesoee que I Lr PETS ES 7 T
56. position of the tool 0 Ifthelastmovement priorto calling the canned cycle G69 has been executed in GOO tool radius compensation G41 G42 can be used Otherwise error 35 will be issued Page Chapter 8 Section 30 MACHINING CANNED CYCLES STOCK PED ALONG Z Example G69 MPT79 NY N190 N200 G41 GO X90 Z 5 N210 G69 PO K80 P1 K 80 P5 K2 P7 K0 8 P8 K0 8 P9 K100 P13 K300 P14 K340 N220 G40 X100 ZO N230 M30 NS GUT ASOZ DO ud cin Profile definition N310 G03 X60 Z 50 I5 K15 N320 G01 X40 Z 40 N330 G03 X10 Z 25 I5 K20 N340 G01 X10 Z 10 Chapter 8 Section Page MACHINING CANNED CYCLES STOCK COD ALONG Z 31 8 13 TURNING CANNED CYCLE WITH STRAIGHT SECTIONS G81 3 0 E a Yi gt P7 oF a gt P8 Format N4 G81 P0 K P1 K P2 K P3 K P5 K P7 K P8 K P9 K Parameter meaning P0 X coordinate value of point A radius or diameter P1 Z coordinate value of point A P2 X coordinate value of point B radius or diameter P3 Zcoordinate value of point B P5 Max step It must be greater than zero or error 3 will be issued The real value calculated by the CNC will be smaller than or equal to the max step P7 Finishing stock allowance on the X axis It must be greater or equal to zero or error 3 will be issued P8 Finishing stock allowance along the Z axis It must be greater or equal to zero or error 3
57. the Begin point keeping the selected safety distance from it along the X and Z axes X 8050405 4 Every roughing pass is performed as indicated in the illustration starting from point 1 going through points 2 3 and 4 and ending at point 5 5 Once the roughing operation has concluded the CNC runs the finishing pass as indicated below and the turning operation will end at the cycle calling point 8050406 The feedrate for the finishing pass is defined by the of the current programmed feedrate If the cycle does not have a finishing pass the tool will move to the cycle calling point after running the last roughing pass 6 The CNC stops the spindle Atention It must be borne in mind that the CNC applies tool radius compensation on the last pass or finishing pass in order to obtain the proper part finish It is necessary to indicate on the tool offset table the cutter tip radius value as well as the location code shape code of the tool to machine with Page Chapter 5 Section 18 AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS TAPER TURNING 5 5 ROUNDING To select this option press It can be executed in three different ways in SEMI AUTOMATIC mode AUTOMATIC ROUNDING mode CYCLE and AUTOMATIC PROFILE ROUNDING mode CYCLE To change modes just press or at the compact model 5 5 1 SEMI AUTOMATIC ROUNDING 8050501 The following data must be defined R Indicates the roun
58. the machine is beyond limitor because a block has been programmed which would force the machine to go beyond limits Z axis travel limit overrun Itis generated either because the machine is beyond limit or because a block has been programmed which would force the machine to go beyond limits X axis following error Z axis following error S value spindle speed too large Feedback error at connector A1 Feedback error at connector A2 Feedback error at connector A3 Feedback error at connector A4 Feedback error at connector A5 Internal CNC hardware error Consult with the Technical Service Department Internal CNC hardware error Consult with the Technical Service Department All the axes have not been homed This error comes up when it is mandatory to search home on all axes after power up This requirement is set by machine parameter Internal CNC hardware error Consult with the Technical Service Department Internal CNC hardware error Consult with the Technical Service Department Internal CNC hardware error Consult with the Technical Service Department Internal CNC hardware error Consult with the Technical Service Department Parity error in tool table or zero offset table G53 G59 Parity error in general parameters Parity error in Z axis parameters Parity error in X axis parameters Parity error in M table Internal CNC hardware error Consult with the Technical Service Department Internal CNC hardware err
59. the other hand if the cutter angle is greater than 45 the H and A values indicate the excess material and the step along Z The following figure shows a part indicating several examples of how the AUTOMATIC PROFILE ROUNDING function may be used The CNC in order to obtain a good part finish applies tool compensation on the last machining pass To do so it needs to know how the tool enters and exits the profile These values are shown at the bottom right of the screen Tt gt gt BEGIN END BEGIN END To select the way the tool enters the profile BEGIN point use the up arrow key and to select the way the tool exits the profile END point use the down arrow key The next figure shows a part indicating with several examples how to define the tool entry and exit Chapter 5 Section Page AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS ROUNDING 27 gt eu gt Sem aS nag Before starting the programmed operation the CNC positions the tool over the BEGIN point at an H distance from it This distance is taken along the X axis when the tool angle T is less Ban or equal to 45 and along the Z axis when is greater than 45 Bo50513b However it is possible to select any other point referred to it by means of the safety distances X and Z Both parameters must be defined with the corresponding sign as shown below Z 80505130 1 To define the safety distances in X and Z press AUX an
60. the safety MAINTE occire era E e 48 EE 6 PROFILES 6 1 6 1 6 1 2 6 1 3 6 2 6 2 1 Profile in Sempamonialc OU re 2 Point Sorne eiee DE E Lo 2 Pout to pount MOVEMOS 3 Special TEATES Ra 4 Profile 15 a tomate Cycle THOU a oae A REI ERE Ra 3 ISTIS RI ILI ER EO E 10 DA A a Ul Ci C del Tod dod 7 4 3 41 Ta Tl po 1 6 Tet 7 8 7 8 1 3 5 2 7 9 Chapter 7 WORKING WITH PART PROGRAMS Access to Ihe pam probrdm a 1 Parisproprcam SCHON ani AR AAA AAA 2 A ETE E 2 Par program SIMAO AAA 4 LOA LUCIO dd 3 Part propram eXecutloll soii tipa 6 Execution of a previously stored Opera te e 7 Tool MSP A evakedaecnerwune suas 8 PAC program MOTO MS 9 Part program deleto sirope 10 uda dE AMI D zabeuis Ui aalamamneuleuetleds 11 Peripheral s T 11 DNG OTM ao e 12 DCR UMIOCE d 13 NEN Chapter 8 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES NENNEN ERROR CODES COMPARISON TABLE FOR FAGOR 800T CNC MODELS AVAILABLE 800T CNC MODELS Compact model with 8 amber CRT Modular model with 9 amber Monitor Consisting of Central Unit Monitor and Keyboard Modular model with 14 Color Monitor Consisting of Central Unit Monitor and Keyboard ISI X Z axes control Spindle control Spindle in RPM Constant Surface Speed CSS Spindle Orientation Tools Tool Compensation Live Tool Electronic Hand wheels
61. to 96 different auxiliary functions M00 through M99 may be programmed except for M41 M42 M43 M44 implicit with the S code if machine parameter P601 1 1 If this parameter is not setto 1 M41 M42 M43 M44 must be programmed The auxiliary functions are output in BCD code The CNC also has 15 decoded outputs for miscellaneous functions These outputs will be assigned to the required functions during the final adjustment of the CNC to the machine The miscellaneous functions which are not assigned a decoded output are always performed at the beginning of the block in which they are programmed In assigning a decoded output to a miscellaneous functions a decision is also made as to whether it is to be performed at the beginning or at the end of the block in which it is programmed Up to a maximum of seven miscellaneous functions may be programmed in one block When more than one miscellaneous function is programmed in a block the CNC executes them consecutively in the order in which they are programmed Some of these miscellaneous functions have an internal meaning assigned to them in the CNC M00 PROGRAM STOP When the CNC reads code M00 in a block it halts the program Press the Cycle Start key to continue It is recommended that this function be set in the table of decoded M functions so that it is executed at the end of the block in which it is programmed see Installation and Start up Manual M01 CONDITIONAL PROGRAM
62. to insert data While in the data inserting mode the characters behind the cursor appear blinking It is not possible to use assisted programming the AUX key Key in all the desired data and press INC ABS If the syntax of the new line is correct the CNC will display it without blinking and if not it will show it blinking until it is edited correctly Page Chapter 3 Section 24 AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS EDITING P99996 4 Once the line has been modified press ENTER The CNC will assume it replacing the previous one To delete a program line proceed as follows 1 If the program line number appearing at the bottom of the screen is not the desired one clear it by pressing CL and key in the desired line number 2 Press and the CNC will delete it from memory Chapter 3 Section Page AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS EDITING P99996 25 4 SPINDLE 4 1 SPINDLE OPERATING MODE SELECTION With this CNC it is possible to work with the spindle in revolutions per minute RPM or at Constant Surface Speed CSS Press CSS to select the desired work mode The CNC will show the selected option highlighted besides the lamp corresponding to this key will be on when working at Constant Surface Speed and off when working in rpm In order for the CNC to change the work mode it is necessary to execute the following sequence Press CSS select the new spindle speed and press 1 If this sequence is no
63. tool change position arithmetic parameters P190 and P191 the axes will move to that position to change the tool If the manufacturer has not set a tool change position arithmetic parameters P134 and P135 must be set for tool change position P134 Xcoordinate of the tool withdrawal point at the end of the cycle Itis setin the current work units in radius or diameter P135 Z coordinate of the tool withdrawal point at the end of the cycle The CNC considers P134 and P135 if the manufacturer has not set a tool change position General concepts I 2 The machining conditions feedrate spindle speed etc must be programmed before calling the cycle These parameters must be programmed in the block before the one calling the cycle N2 F10 S1000 M03 N4 P100 K P101 K P102 K P103 K P4 K P19 K P20 K N6 G67 NO The canned cycle does not alter the call parameters P22 P23 and P26 which may be used in later cycles However it does modify the values of the basic parameters defining the cycle The basic operation is described in detail in the Operating manual The exit conditions are GOO and G90 Chapter 8 Section Page MACHINING CANNED CYCLES TURNING 3 G67 NO 8 2 FACING CANNED CYCLE G67 NI XA 8050302 Basic parameters defining a cycle P100 X coordinate of the BEGIN point in the selected units in radius or diameter P101 Z coordinate of the BEGIN point P102 X coordi
64. tool position With this CNC it is possible to display the position of the axes in either mm or inches To change the type of display units press AUX and select the MM INCH option Every time this option is selected the CNC will toggle the display units from mm to inches and vice versa showing the axis position in the selected units To exit the operating mode for auxiliary functions and return to the standard display mode press AUX END or CLEAR 1 3 1 X AXIS DISPLAY UNITS radius diameter The 800T CNC can show the X axis position in radius or diameter The main window and next to the X axis position display shows the DIAMETER or RADIUS message indicating the selected display units To change the type of units press AUX and select the radius diameter option Every time this option is selected the CNC will toggle the display units from one to the other and it will show the X position in the new selected units To exit the operating mode for auxiliary functions and return to the standard display mode press AUX END or CLEAR Page Chapter 1 Section 8 CONCEPTS DISPLAY UNITS 1 4 REFERENCE SYSTEMS The machine where this CNC is installed needs to have the Machine Reference Zero home for each axis defined This point is set by the manufacturer as the origin of the coordinate system of the machine Itis also possible to establish another origin point for programming the part dimensions
65. value of point A radius or diameter P1 Zcoordinate value of point A P2 X coordinate value of point B radius or diameter P3 Zcoordinate value of point B P5 Max step It must be greater than zero or error 3 will be issued The real step calculated by the CNC will be smaller than or equal to the max step P7 Finishingstockallowance on the X axis It must be greater or equal to zero or error 3 will be issued P8 Finishing stock allowance along the Z axis It must be greater or equal to zero or error 3 will be issued P9 Feedrateofthe finishing pass If itis zero there will be no finishing pass If itis negative error 3 will be issued P18 Distance between the point A and the arc s center along the X axis Although the X axis is programmed in diameter the values of I are always programmed in radius P19 K distance between the point A and the arc s center along the Z axis Page Chapter 8 Section 38 MACHINING CANNED CYCLES FACING WITH CURVED SECTIONS G85 Programming example in diameter Starting point 0 X150 Z85 Profile points A X118 Z11 B X0Z70 Arc center C X160 Z91 NOO GOO X ISO Z 89 riensi gsnt Tool positioning at point 0 N100 G85 PO K118 P1 K11 P2 K0 P3 K70 P5 K5 P7 K4 P8 K4 P9 K100 P18 K21 P19 K80 When programming this canned cycle take into account the following aspects 1 The distance between the starting point 0 and final point B along the Z
66. will move to the cycle calling point after running the last roughing pass The CNC stops the spindle Page 14 Chapter 5 Section AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS FACING 5 4 TAPER TURNING Press to select this option It permits the simultaneous machining along the X and Z axes in order to obtain chamfers and tapered surfaces To select either the Semiautomatic or the Automatic Cycle mode press Or at the compact model 5 4 1 SEMI AUTOMATIC TAPER TURNING XA Z 8050401 It is possible to perform chamfers being necessary to define the angle QU or the slope of the chamfer Since there_is no key to select it press the one corresponding to another data for example and then press the down arrow key to select the data Itis also necessary to select the type of profile to be machined by means of the up and down arrow keys as indicated below 8050402 The operator will move the machine to the beginning point by means of either the mechanical handwheel electronic handwheel or the JOG keys on the operator panel To carry out the chamfer with the indicated inclination use the JOG keys corresponding to the Z axis Z and Z according to the direction of movement The tool will move with the indicated slope and in the chosen direction until 6 is pressed Chapter 5 Section Page AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS TAPER TURNING 15 5 4 2 AUTOMAT
67. 0 N15 Z60 Incremental coordinates NO G00 G91 X 42 Z 7 N5 G33 Z 46 K5 N10 G00 X42 N15 Z53 b Taper threading 2mm deep taper thread along the Z axis with a 5mm pitch The current tool position is X60 Z60 X in radius X y Chapter 6 Section Page ADDITIONAL PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS CAE c a EDAM 5 Absolute coordinates Incremental coordinates NO G00 G90 X12 75 Z52 NO G00 G91 X 47 25 Z 8 N5 G33 X18 25 Z8 K5 N5 G33 X5 5 Z 44 K5 N10 G00 X60 N10 G00 X41 75 N15 Z60 N15 Z52 c Joining multiple threads When operating in round corner G05 different threads may be joined together on the same part Joining a longitudinal thread and a tapered one along the Z axis Both 2 mm deep and with 5mm pitch The current tool position is X60 Z60 X in radius Absolute coordinates NO G00 G90 X8 Z57 N5 G33 G05 Z35 K5 N10 X18 8 Z8 K5 N15 G00 X60 N20 Z60 Page Chapter 6 ADDITIONAL PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS Section ELECTRONIC THREADING G33 6 5 SCALING FACTOR G72 By using functions G72 it is possible to enlarge or reduce programmed parts This way itis possible to program several parts having the same shape but different sizes in a single program G72 must be programmed alone in the block The programming format N4 G72 K2 4 N Block number G72 Scaling factor code K Value of the scaling factor Minimum value K0 0001 Multi
68. 0 mm Period P608 4 P608 7 Increasing Io sequence with positive or negative count X Z axes 0 Increasing Io with positive count 1 increasing Io with negative count P608 5 Scale 3 3 P608 4 P608 5 Scale 3 P608 4 COS COC COX 1 1 MOVS 1 1 MOVC 1 1 MOVX 1 COVS 1 FOT 1 1 COVC 1 FOS 1 1 COVX 1 0 FOC 1 1 P908 P909 Scale offset or Home position Machine Reference M with x respect to the Scale zero point X Z axes 4 Linear transducers scales with coded Io have a graduated scale with their own Scale zero point Therefore a 20 mm gt Z or 100 mm move is enough to know the axis position with w respect to the Scale zero point 7 A Reference point When the feedback system has a coded Io this point is only used when leadscrew error compensation is needed The leadscrew error on this point must be 0 Scale offset setting The scale offset must be adjusted on one axis at a time The following procedure is recommended Indicate by parameters P600 7 amp P600 6 the up or down flank of the marker pulse Io of the feedback system Indicate by parameters P618 8 amp P618 7 the home searching direction for the axes Set parameters P807 and P808 with the home searching feedrate for the axes Set parameters P908 and P909 to 0 scale offset 2 Position the axis at the right position and execute the home search command for that axis When done with the home searc
69. 00 code corresponding to a tool with zero dimensions Each address of the tool offset table 01 through 32 contains the following fields X Tool length along the X axis 8388 607 mm 330 2599 inches Z Tool length along the Z axis 8388 607 mm 330 2599 inches F Location code tool shape eeeeess FO thru F9 see figure R NAAA ni trit erect 1000 000 mm 39 3700 inches I Tool wear along the X axis always in diameter 32 766 mm 1 2900 K Tool length wear along the Z axis 32 766 mm 1 2900 inches Atention If the machine manufacturer has associated a subroutine with the T function nothing must be programmed after the T function Otherwise the CNC will issue the corresponding error message If the tool change has no subroutine associated with it manufacturer the CNC outputs the code for the new tool displays the message TOOL CHANGE in English for all language versions and it interrupts program execution Chapter 4 Section Page ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS TOOL PROGRAMMING T 5 LOCATION CODES TOOL SHAPE Code 0 and 9 KF i Co wm Code 1 Code 7 C m 7 i M m 7 P Code 2 X Code 6 Wa y ML T Code 3 M Code 5 E X P Tool Tip C Tool Center Page Chapter 4 Section ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS TOOL
70. 1 1 CNC PROGRAM STRUCTURE All program blocks lines of the program will have the following structure Block number Block contents Chapter 1 Section Page PROGRAM WRITING 1 1 2 BLOCK NUMBER The block number serves to identify each one of the program blocks It is expressed by the letter N followed by up to 4 digits 0 9999 These program blocks must be in numerical order N10 N15 N37 N46 etc It is recommended not to assign them sequential numbers N10 N11 N12 N13 etc in order to be able to insert future blocks between them if so required Atention A All throughout this manual we will indicate an N4 format when referring to a block number meaning that the N letter must be followed by up to 4 digits without decimals 1 2 1 CONDITIONAL BLOCK BLOCK SKIP There are two types of conditional blocks a b REGULAR BLOCK SKIP N4 If the block number N4 is followed by a period the block is set as a regular block skip This means that the CNC will execute it only if the corresponding conditional block skip input is activated When executing any program the CNC reads four blocks ahead look ahead of the one currently in execution In order for the conditional block to be executed the conditional input must be activated 4 blocks ahead of the conditional block SPECIAL CONDITIONAL BLOCK BLOCK SKIP N4 If the block number N4 is followed by two periods
71. 1 SELECT AND INITIATE TOOL RADIUS COMPENSATION G41 G42 To activate it codes G41 and G42 must be used The block containing G41 or G42 or the previous one must contain the T function TO1 through T32 selecting the tool offset to be applied If no tool has been selected the CNC assumes T00 with tool offset values equal to 0 no dimensions Atention G41 or G42 can only be selected on linear movements G00 or G01 active If this type of compensation is first mentioned on a circular movement G02 or G03 the CNC will issue error 48 The next pages show the various cases where tool radius compensation may be initiated Compensated path T C Programmed path T P E T P T C T P Chapter 7 Section Page TOOL COMPENSATION TOOL RADIUS 5 COMPENSATION G41 G42 T P Programmed path T C 2 Compensated path Page Chapter 7 TOOL COMPENSATION Section TOOL RADIUS COMPENSATION G41 G42 7 2 OPERATION WITH TOOL RADIUS COMPENSATION Next some drawing are shown describing the various tool paths with and without tool radius compensation Compensated path T C Programmed path T P T C T P Chapter 7 Section Page OPERATION WITH TOOL OO O EN RADIUS COMPENSATION T P Compensated path T C Programmed path T P Page Chapter 7 Section RADIUS
72. 10 000 7100 CSS 0100 RPM 0200 7 100 BEG X 0001500 Z 0000 500 END X 0096 842 Z 0094 212 Ae 1 This window indicates the selected operating mode DRO Turning threading etc It also indicates the CNC status while executing the automatic operations in execution interrupted or in position 2 Main window This displays shows the current tool position X and Z coordinates as well as the spindle speed S and the tool T currently selected It also shows the display units being selected and the active spindle speed range Chapter 1 Section Page CONCEPTS CRT DESCRIPTION 1 3 This window shows the following information The axis feedrate F currently selected and the override percentage 46 currently being applied When the RPM mode is selected the CNC displays the word RPM and the value of the spindle speed currently active in revolutions per minute When the Constant Surface Speed mode CSS is selected the CNC shows the word MAX and the value of the maximum speed allowed for the spindle in rpm Atention The CSS value is given in m min or feet min The MAX value is also given in rpm as well as the actual spindle speed S displayed at the main window The percentage 96 of the programmed spindle speed being applied The direction of the spindle rotation The tool to be used to perform the selected automatic operation This data is defined while e
73. 100 G90 X40 Z 30 N110 Z 70 The block containing G92 cannot have any other function The coordinate preset by G92 always refers to the current theoretical position of the axes Page Chapter 3 Section 2 REFERENCE SYSTEMS COORDINATE PRESET G92 3 3 POLAR ORIGIN PRESET G93 By means of function G93 it is possible to preset any point as the origin of polar coordinates There are two ways to preset a polar origin a By setting the coordinates of the polar origin Format N4 G93 I 4 3 K 4 3 in mm N4 G93 I 3 4 K 3 4 in inches N Block number G93 Polar origin presetting code I Abscissa value of the polar origin X value always an absolute value K Ordinate value of the polar origin Z value always an absolute value When using this polar origin presetting method the CNC does not admit any other information in the same block b By assuming the current point as the new polar origin If in any block a G93 is also programmed it will mean that the new origin point will be the current position before moving the axes to the position programmed in that block Atention When programming a circular interpolation with G02 G03 the CNC assumes the center of the arc as the new polar origin On power up or after an M02 M30 EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC assumes the X0 Z0 point as the polar origin Chapter 3 Section Page REFERENCE SYSTEMS POLAR T PRESET 3 3 4 ZER
74. 2 G03 X 4 3 Z 4 3 R 4 3 In inches G02 G03 X 3 4 Z 3 4 R 3 4 Where oe Circular interpolation code X coordinate of the end point z Z coordinate of the end point R Radius of the arc This means that the circular interpolation may be programmed by means of the end point and the arc radius instead of the arc center coordinates I K When the arc is smaller than 180 the radius must be programmed with a positive sign and with negative sign if otherwise AET Considering PO as the starting point of the arc and P1 as N the end point four different arcs may be defined with the 4 same radius Depending on the direction of the circular interpolation pe mc G02 or G03 and the sign of the radius the resulting arc 7 programming formats are x Arc 1 GO2X ZR Arc 2G02XZR A Arc 3 GOS X ZR Arc 4 G03 XZR MPT04 Atention will issue error 47 indicating that there are infinite solutions N If a complete circle is programmed using any of these four formats the CNC Chapter 5 Section Page CIRCULAR EA CONTROL INTERPOLATION G02 G03 2 5 5 2 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION WITH ABSOLUTE CENTER COORDINATES G06 By adding function G06 to a block containing a circular interpolation it is possible to use absolute coordinates for the arc center I K that is with respect to the part zero and not referred to the arc s starting point G06 is NOT MODAL Therefore it must be pr
75. 25 Function G25 may be used to jump from one block to another within the same program The block containing G25 may not contain any other information There are two programming formats Format a N4 G25 N4 N4 Block number G25 Unconditional jump code N4 Block number jumping to When the CNC reads this block the program jumps to the indicated block and continues its execution from there on Example NO G00 X100 N5 Z50 N10 G25 N50 N15 X50 N20 Z70 N50 G01 X20 When reaching block N10 the CNC skips blocks N15 and N20 continuing from N50 to the end of the program Format b N4 G25 N4 4 2 N4 Block number G25 Unconditional jump code N4 4 2 L Number of repetitions Number of the last block to be executed Number of the block jumping to When the CNC reads a block of this type jumps to the block defined between N and the first period Executes the program portion between this block and the one defined between the two periods as many times as indicated by the last figure This last figure may be between 0 and 99 However if an arithmetic parameter is used to define it its value may be between 0 and 255 When writing only N4 4 the CNC will execute this program section only once same as for N4 4 1 Once the CNC has completed the last repetition of the section it returns to the block following the one containing G25 N4 4 2 Page Chapter 6 Section UNCONDITIONAL ADDITIONAL PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS JU
76. 39 3700 inches F Location or tool shape code It must be defined for using tool radius compensation Possible codes FO through F9 see illustration on the next pages Tool radius compensation becomes active by programming G41 or G42 assuming the table value by means of the T function TOI through T32 If no T has been programmed the CNC assumes the TOO value which corresponds to a tool with no dimensions 0 G41 and G42 are modal maintained and are canceled by G40 M02 M30 an EMERGENCY or a general RESET Atention The I values for tool radius wear must always be programmed in diameter Page Chapter 7 Section 2 TOOL COMPENSATION LOCATION CODES TOOL SHAPE Code 0 and 9 X i aX NET ES Code 1 Code 7 Es C Be 7 i P j Code 2 X xx Code 6 A we I we 7 P Code 3 ns T Code 5 MPT66 U En Y N vU ES Y N P Tool tip C Tool center Chapter 7 Section Page TOOL COMPENSATION 3 Code 4 P Code 5 x gt P mm 7 N Code 6 X P M Code 7 X P wm Code 8 X cq E P Ee lem MPT67 P Tool tip C Tool center Code 4 fee I E ic 5 Code 3 x dum i O Code 2 ip Code 1 Page Chapter 7 4 TOOL COMPENSATION Section 7
77. 4 G66 PO K25 Chapter 8 Section Page MACHINING CANNED CYCLES 1 8 1 TURNING CANNED CYCLE G67 NO X 8050202 Basic parameters defining a cycle P100 X coordinate of the BEGIN point in the selected units in radius or diameter P101 Z coordinate of the BEGIN point P102 X coordinate of the END point in the selected units in radius or diameter P103 Z coordinate of the END point P4 Turning pass D It must have a positive radius value If programmed with a 0 value the CNC will assume parameter P5 number of roughing passes If both P4 and P5 are equal to 0 the CNC will issue the corresponding message P6 Final diameter f to be obtained in the turning operation P19 Safety distance along the X axis always in radius P20 Safety distance along the Z axis Parameters related to the finishing pass If no finishing pass is desired set P22 KO and P23 KO P22 Percentage 96 of programmed roughing pass used as finishing pass P23 Percentage of programmed roughing feedrate used as finishing feedrate Parameters related to the finishing tool When using one roughing tool and a different finishing tool set the following parameters When using the same tool for roughing and finishing set P26 KO Page Chapter 8 Section TURNING 2 MACHINING CANNED CYCLES G67 NO P26 Indicates the finishing tool to be used If the manufacturer has set a
78. 4 P1 F11 K6 F12 Entire Part Integer without decimals N4 P1 F12 P2 ees P1 takes the integer value of P2 N4 P1 F12 K54A P1z5 F13 Entire part plus one N4 P1 F13 P2 ns P1 takes the integer value of P2 plus 1 N4 P1 F13KS54A Pl 5 1 6 F14 Entire part minus one N4 P1 F14 P27 Pl takes the integer value of P27 minus 1 N4 P5 F14 KS 4 P5 5 1 4 F15 Absolute value N4 P1 F15 P2 P1 takes the absolute value of P2 N4 P1 F15 K 8 P1 8 F16 Complement N4 P7 F16 P20 P7 takes the value of P20 with the opposite sign P7 P20 N4 P7 F16 K10 P7 2 10 Page Chapter 10 Section OPERATORS 4 PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING FI through F16 10 3 OPERATORS F17 through F29 These functions do not affect the jump flags F17 NA4PI FI7P2 P1 takes the memory address value location of the block number indicated by P2 Example N4 P1 F17 K12 P1 takes the value of the memory address where block N12 is located F18 NA4PI F18 P2 P1 takes the X coordinate value contained in the block whose address is located at P2 F18 does not admit a constant operand Example P1 F18 K2 IS WRONG F19 N4 P1 F19 P2 P1 takes the Z coordinate value contained in the block located at P2 F19 does not admit a constant operand Example P1 F19 K3 IS WRONG F20 N4 P1 F20 P2 P1 takes the memory address v
79. 4 P101 K P103 K P8 K P13 K P19 K P20 K N6 G67 N7 The canned cycle does not alter the call parameters P22 P23 and P26 which may be used in later cycles However itdoes modify the values of the basic parameters defining the cycle The basic operation is described in detail in the Operating manual The exit conditions are GOO and G90 Chapter 8 Section Page MACHINING CANNED CYCLES SIMPLE DRILLING 17 G67 N7 SLOT MILLING CANNED CYCLE G67 N8 END BEGIN Basic parameters defining a cycle P100 X coordinate of the BEGIN point in the selected units in radius or diameter P101 Z coordinate of the BEGIN point P102 X coordinate of the END point in the selected units in radius or diameter P103 Z coordinate of the END point P4 Angular increment A between slots It must be given in degrees P5 Number of slots to be milled P16 Indicates the angular position a of the first slot P19 Safety distance along the X axis in radius P20 Safety distance along the Z axis P21 Milling feedrate Page Chapter 8 Section 18 SLOT MILLING MACHINING CANNED CYCLES G67 N8 General concepts 1 2 The machining conditions feedrate spindle speed etc must be programmed before calling the cycle These parameters must be programmed in the block before the one calling the cycle N2 F10 S1000 M03 N4 P100 K P101 K P102 K P103 K P4 K P5 K P16 K P19 K P20 K N6 G67 N8
80. 47 Work Zone or Exclusion Zone Feature 046 0 04720 Feature disabled 046 20 047 1 Zone enabled as Work Zone No exit zone 046 1 047 0 Zone enabled as Exclusion Zone No entry zone 046 1 047 1 Basic operation P622 5 1 Feature disabled On power up the CNC assumes the zone set by machine parameters P902 P903 P904 and P905 Nevertheless the zone boundaries may be changed via part program by allocating the new values to the following arithmetic parameters P206 Most positive X coordinate P207 Least positive X coordinate P208 Most positive Z coordinate P209 Least positive Z coordinate The CNC will then assume these new values but it will not modify the actual settings of machine parameters P902 P903 P904 and P905 On the other hand it must be kept in mind that on power up the CNC will reset these zone boundaries to the values set by machine parameters As described earlier this predefined zone may be enabled either as a work zone no exit or as an exclusion zone no entry from the PLCI by means of outputs 046 and 047 When set as a work zone the CNC acts as follows The axes cannot be jogged out of this zone by using the jog keys or the handwheels If attempted to do so during execution the CNC will issue error 67 X Z Limit Error When set as an exclusion zone the CNC acts as follows The axes cannot be jogged into this zone by using the
81. 5 180 5 T aT 5 A H 10 T 1 F CSS Chapter 8 Section Page PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES EXAMPLE 4 25 El b fix BEGIN X38 Z 165 ZA R 3 ZF X 1 N Z T 1 T F CSS D gt AUX BEGIN X32 Z 162 76 R 3 AF A X 5 N Z 1 T 1 T F CSS Page Chapter 8 Section 26 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES EXAMPLE 4 BEGIN X33 Z 99 85 END X35 2 102 30 5 BEGIN X17 Z 18 35 ZA END X18 5 Z 20 5 RF 15 X 11 A Z N T TW 2 15 T 2 F CSS Chapter 8 Section Page PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES EXAMPLE 4 27 BEGIN X28 Z 47 76A END X28 Z 50 ZF 20 X Z N T TW 3 T 4 F CSS aux BEGIN X33 Z 80 75 END X33 Z 101 ZF P 2 X 5 H 2x0 613 1 226 Z 1 A T Q T 3 F CSS Page Chapter 8 Section 28 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES EXAMPLE 4 BEGIN x23 5 Z 30 END X28 Z 48 P 1 5 H 1 5x0 613 0 919 A a T 3 F CSS BEGIN X17 ZO END X17 Z 19 5 1 0 613 ob Hu aq SEIS gt z Chapter 8 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES Section EXAMPLE 4 Page 29 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 025 026 027 This error occurs when the first character of the block to be executed is not an N Too many digits when defining a function in general A negative value has been assi
82. 5 2 Section 5 7 Section 5 5 3 Section 5 5 3 Section 6 2 Section 6 2 Section 5 8 Section 3 8 3 1 Section 5 1 3 Section 3 11 Section 3 10 Section 3 10 Section 3 12 Section 3 11 Chapter 9 Section 4 3 4 Date March 1995 Software version 5 2 and newer FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND SECTION Editing of program P99996 in all models When interrupting the execution the following Installation Manual Section 3 11 keys are enabled spindle coolant O1 O2 O3 Operating Manual Section 3 10 and TOOL Operating Manual Section 5 1 4 Operating Manual Section 7 5 Incremental JOG movements taking current Installation Manual Section 4 3 3 work units radius or diameter into account ISO programming New functions G47 G48 Programming Manual Section 6 7 single block treatment ISO programming New function G86 Programming Manual Section 8 17 Longitudinal threadcutting canned cycle Request from the PLCI for real spindle rpm PLCI Manual Date November 1995 Software version 5 5 and newer FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND SECTION Tool offset modification while in execution Operating Manual Section 3 4 4 Operation with a single electronic handwheel Installation Manual Section 4 3 2 Installation Manual Section 7 5 Actual S speed reading from the PLCI PLCI Manual INTRODUCTION SAFETY CONDITIONS Readthe following safety measures in orderto prevent damage to personnel
83. 7 On machines with a manual tool changer when the CNC detects that the tool must be changed it interrupts the execution and it displays a message for the operator to proceed with the tool change Certain precautions must be taken sometimes when changing tools Those conditions must be handled by the PLC Therefore from this version on when the CNC displays the tool change warning message it also activates the PLC input I97 and it cancels it when the message is removed Version 6 6 November 1997 1 HANDLING FEEDBACK SYSTEMS WITH CODED Io semi absolute Machine parameters P608 5 P608 8 Type of Home marker signal of the feedback system X Z axes 0 normal Io 1 coded Io P608 3 P608 6 Period of the coded Io signal X Z signal 0 20mm Period 1 100 mm Period P608 4 P608 7 Increasing Io sequence with positive or negative count X Z axes 0 Increasing Io with positive count 1 increasing Io with negative count P608 5 P608 3 P608 4 P608 5 P608 3 P608 4 COS 1 1 MOVS 1 COC 1 0 MOVC 1 COX 1 0 MOVX 1 COVS 1 1 FOT 1 COVC 1 0 FOS 1 COVX 1 0 FOC 1 1 1 1 P908 P909 Scale offset or Home position Machine Reference M with x respect to the Scale zero point X Z axes 4 Linear transducers scales with coded Io have a graduated scale with their own Scale zero point Therefore a 20 mm gt Z or 100 mm move is enough to know the axis position with w respect to the Scale
84. 7 ZF 16 X 1 Z 1 N T 1 F CSS El 5 BEGIN X16 ZO ZA 14 ZF A X 13 N Z 1 Q 45 T T 1 F CSS Page Chapter 8 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES Section EXAMPLE 1 BEGIN X28 Z 85 ZA END X28 Z 87 ZF 26 5 X 8 N 1 Z 0 TW 2 T T 2 F CSS BEGIN X16 Z 15 ZA END X17 2 17 AF 14 X 13 N 1 Z 0 TW 2 T T 2 F CSS Chapter 8 Section Page PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES EXAMPLE 1 9 X28 Z 70 76A X28 Z 86 1 5 1 5x0 613 0 919 BEGIN X16 Zo ZA X16 2 16 AF P X 15 H 0 613 Z 0 A a T F C Page Chapter 8 Section 10 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES EXAMPLE 1 EXAMPLE 2 o ES i e Q x o co O o 2i 1 98S Sa c 45 P la45 Y 2 15 ri 2 27 1845 66 70 85 gt 98 125 gt 135 a 155 gt L T1 T2 T3 Chapter 8 Section Page PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES EXAMPLE2 11 i A v BEGIN END H 15 aT 5 T 1 F CSS 76 AE X 40 Z 20 Pi X17 Pe X17 P3 X19 P4 X24 P5 X24 P6 X28 P7 X28 P8 X30 P9 X30 P10 X38 P11 X38 P12 X44 EID BEGIN X38 Z 125 3 QAZ AF Z 11 Page 12 Chapter 8 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES Section EXAMPLE 2 b A BEGIN X30 Z 125 ZA R 1 ZF X 1 N Z 11 T 1 T F CSS BEGIN X17 ZO ZA END X17 Z 17 ZF 16 X 1 A Z 1 N T 1 F CSS Chapter 8
85. 8 Indicates the corner geometry Together with P10 it defines the type of corner P15 1 P15 0 oO n A A A Aa Aa A X 2 SSS a A FVFYFPPEPV P10 1 P10 4 alla la lA lo P10 2 P10 3 AAAAaAAaA LL P10 3 P10 2 bd Chapter 8 Section 10 MACHINING CANNED CYCLES AGO P19 Safety distance along the X axis in radius P20 Safety distance along the Z axis Parameters related to the finishing pass If no finishing pass is desired set P222K0 and P23 KO P22 Percentage 96 of programmed roughing pass used as finishing pass P23 Percentage of programmed roughing feedrate used as finishing feedrate Parameters related to the finishing tool When using one roughing tool and a different finishing tool set the following parameters When using the same tool for roughing and finishing set P262 KO P26 Indicates the finishing tool to be used If the manufacturer has set a tool change position arithmetic parameters P190 and P191 the axes will move to that position to change the tool If the manufacturer has not set a tool change position arithmetic parameters P134 and P135 must be set for tool change position P134 Xcoordinate of the tool withdrawal point at the end ofthe cycle Itis setin the current work units in radius or diameter P135 Z coordinate of the tool withdrawal point at the end of the cycle The CNC considers P134 and P135 if
86. 888 888 Z8888 888 R2 B888 8B8 R3 8BB8 888 R4 8888 888 R5 8888 888 R 8888 888 R7 8688 8866 If machine parameter P617 8 0 the profile must consist of straight sections only and no rounding may be defined The profile may be defined by 12 points P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P9 X8888 888 X8888 888 X8888 888 X8888 888 X8888 888 X8888 888 X8888 888 X8888 888 X8888 888 P10 X8888 888 P11 X8888 888 P12 X8888 888 Z8888 888 28888 888 Z8888 888 Z8888 888 Z8888 888 Z8888 888 Z8888 888 Z8888 888 Z8888 888 Z8888 888 Z8888 888 28888 888 Chapter 6 PROFILES Section AUTOMATIC MODE CYCLE Page Point P1 is the beginning point of the profile and it depends on the machining direction The rest of the points must be correlative When not all the definition points are used the unused points must be set with the value corresponding to the last point of the profile In the example of the illustration P12 must be P11 P10 P9 P8 P7 Depending on the sign assigned to parameter H the roughing operation will be carried out as follows H The successive passes will be carried out parallel to the programmed profile H An initial roughing operation will be carried out turning or facing and a final roughing pass to maintain the finishing stock excess material Ged des didis 3 P H Page Chapter 6 Section 6 PROFILES AUTOMATIC MODE
87. ARAMETER ASSOCIATED WITH M FUNCTIONS Machine parameter P620 8 indicates when the M functions M3 M4 and M5 are to be output during the acceleration and deceleration of the spindle P620 8 0 ESRA P620 8 Ec CANCEL TOOL OFFSET DURING TOOL CHANGE From this version on itis possible to execute within a subroutine associated with the tool a T 0 type block to cancel the tool offset This allows to move to a specific position without having to do cumbersome calculations It is only possible to cancel T 0 or change T xx the tool offset The tool cannot be changed Txx xx within the subroutine associated with the tool XI FACTOR FOR FEEDBACK PULSES Machine parameters P620 5 and P620 6 are used together with P602 6 and P602 5 which indicate the multiplying factor of the feedback pulses for the X and Z axes respectively They indicate whether x1 factor is applied to the feedback pulses 1 or not 0 P620 5 0 and P620 6 0 the x1 factor is NOT applied P620 5 1 and P620 6 1 the x1 factor is applied Example We would like to obtain a 0 01 mm resolution with a square signal encoder mounted on the X axis having a leadscrew pitch of 5mm turn Number of Encoder pulses leadscrew pitch multiplying factor x Resolution Con P602 6 0 and P620 5 20 x4 multiplying factor Number of pulses 125 Con P602 6 1 and P620 5 0 x2 multiplying factor Number of pulses 250 Con P602 6 0 and P620 5 21 x2 multiplying fa
88. ATH CONTROL ARC DEFINED BY 3 POINTS G09 5 8 TANGENTIAL ENTRY G37 MPT24 By means of function G37 it is possible to link two paths tangentially without having to calculate the intersection points G37 is not modal and therefore must be programmed every time the tangential link between two paths is desired These paths may be straight to straight or straight to curve G37 must be followed by the radius of the entry arc R4 3 in mm or R3 4 in inches The radius value must always be positive G37 R must be programmed in the linear movement to be affected by it either a GOO or a G01 If G37 R is programmed in a circular interpolation G02 or G03 the CNC will issue error 41 Example X axis programmed in radius xi Starting point X20 Z60 Apc N100 G90 G01 X20 Z30 N110 G03 X40 Z10 R20 ns Q 20 30 60 Z Same example applying a tangential entry with a 5mm radius Xi N100 G90 G01 G37 R5 X20 Z30 9 N110 G03 X40 Z10 R20 ny E a 20 Oe Z E E amp 5 30 60 Z Chapter 5 Section Page PATH CONTROL TANGENTIAL ENTRY G37 9 5 9 TANGENTIAL EXIT G38 By means of function G38 it is possible to link two paths tangentially without having to calculate the intersection points G38 is not modal and therefore must be programmed every time the tangential link between two paths is desired These pa
89. BEGIN X uS The last figure shows how the safety distance along Z may be used to carry out two machining operations in one Rounding Turning Profile rounding 1044 V411H yy ly Abanton al 7 gut VAR 77 EL TA 805080 a Threadcutting Chapter 5 Section Page AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS USAGE OF SAFETY 49 DISTANCE 6 PROFILES With this option it is possible to store up to 12 points X Z in order to later machine that profile or make movements to any of those points In order to work in this mode the lamp must be on If not on press this key When accessing this mode the bottom of the CNC screen shows the position values coord inates of the first three points of the profile To edit or modify any of them press P The CNC will show the highlighted coordinates of the first point P1 To select another point use the up and down arrow keys and press CL to quit the editing mode If while in the editing mode and being any point for example P10 currently selected the P key is pressed the CNC will select the first profile point P1 again It is possible to edit and execute profiles in SEMI AUTOMATIC or AUTOMATIC mode Press to select the desired mode With this CNC it is possible to edit and execute profiles in Semi automatic or in Automatic mode To select the desired mode press _ or LEVEL at the compact model aa Ch
90. BRATION which is described next Once they have been calibrated the CNC assigns to each tool offset the X and Z dimensions of the corresponding tool To edit or modify the contents of a tool offset R and F values or to modify its dimensions X Z I K values select the corresponding offset at the CNC by keying the desired tool number and then pressing RECALL The editing area will show the current values assigned to that tool offset To change these values move the cursor by means of the up and down arrow keys until it is placed over the current value The new values must be keyed in over the current ones Once the new values have been keyed in press ENTER so that they are stored in memory To quit this mode move the cursor to the right until it is out of the editing area and then press END Chapter 3 Section Page AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS TOOL TABLE 5 3 4 2 TOOL CALIBRATION With this option it is possible to calibrate and load the tool dimensions onto the tool offset table of the CNC The CNC shows a graphic at the lower right hand side of the monitor used as a user guide during tool calibration highlighting the data being requested at the time To calibrate a tool a work piece of known dimensions is used and the procedure is as follows 1 The CNC requests the work piece dimension along the X axis Key in this value and press ENTER It must be given in the machine work
91. Block Sapiens 2 1 3 BOCE Son ona nai 3 1 4 Preparatory tunehons abu in 4 1 4 K sb i c ll sid CNG T 4 NEN Chapter 2 COORDINATE PROGRAMMING 2 1 Measuring units Millimeters or inches GT G70 sesion cintas unen 1 pue Absolute Incremental programming G90 GIT Louis eei eese stern astas pibes 2 2 4 C pam de ori aci 3 2 5 1 CAES CODE TREO asta E QUERER UR ULUSM daa 3 2 32 Polar coordinates nuca 4 233 Programming by two angles FAI E sapito 6 2 3 4 By one angle and one cartesian coord male venis iaa 7 Ss Chapter 3 REFERENCE SYSTEMS 3 1 Machine Reference home search Ural ninia iaa 1 3 2 Coordinate preset ds cl APA Pue E 2 Ja Polar orein pieset OS herena EER RIEN REEE 3 3 4 ZETO DIESE PODA Aia 4 25 Store and retrieve current Part Zero G31 132 iieri erp epi rrt AES AER tases 6 Section Page E Chapter 4 OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 1 Fecdarale prorrata Pi as 1 4 1 1 Feedrate F in mm min or tenths of an inch min G94 00 0 ecescecessteceseeeeeeeesseeeenenes 2 4 1 2 Feedrate 1a t m reyv or mches rey 95 uiusescie ete rti treu et Ma REESE RES Rd DERE 2 4 1 3 Programmable feedrate override G49 coi ieieciacassarinieni sicoceniasiniasiarianesiariniadignweesiantenaeions 2 4 2 Spindle speed and spindle orientation Susana dnd 3 4 2 1 Spinde speed spia OST as a 4 2 2 Constant Surface Speed S in m min or feet min G96 ooococnnocccocanononinonaconanonnncconenon 4 4 2 3 Spindle speed limit for Constant Surface Speed G92 cccscciccesscas
92. CHINE REFERENCE HOME SEARCH G74 When programming G74 in a block the CNC moves the axes to the machine reference point home Two cases may occur a Search on both axes If the block only contains G74 the CNC moves the X axis first and then the Z axis b Search on one axis only or on both axes in a particular order To home only one axis indicate the desired axis after function G74 To home both axes but in a particular order other than the one described in a program G74 followed by the axes in the desired order A block containing G74 cannot have any other function When the homing axis reaches home the screen displays the distance from that point to the last programmed part zero minus the tool length along that axis X or Z Chapter 3 Section Page MACHINE REFERENCE REFERENCE SYSTEMS HOME SEARCH G74 1 3 2 COORDINATE PRESET G92 By means of function G92 it is possible to preset any value for the CNC axes which translates into being able to apply any zero offset When programming function G92 the axes do not move and the CNC assumes the axis values programmed after G92 as the new coordinates for those axes Programming format N4G92XZ Example X axis programmed in diameter and starting point PO X20 Z80 X 1 20 10 PO Without using function G92 MPTS8 e N100 G01 G90 X40 Z50 N110 Z10 Using function G92 N90 G92 X20 Z0 Point PO now becomes point X20 Z0 N
93. Chapter 7 Section 10 WORKING WITH PART PROGRAMS PART PROGRAM DELETION 7 8 PERIPHERALS With this CNC it is possible to communicate with the FAGOR Floppy Disk Unit with a general peripheral device or with a computer in order to transfer programs from and to one another This communication may be managed either from the CNC when in the Peripheral mode or from the computer by means of FAGOR s DNC protocol in which case the CNC may be in any of its operating mode 7 8 1 PERIPHERAL MODE In this mode the CNC may communicate with the FAGOR Floppy Disk Unit with a general peripheral device or with a computer having a standard off the shelf communications program To access this mode select the Peripherals option of the Auxiliary modes after pressing AUX Once this option is selected the upper left hand side of the CNC screen will show the following menu RECEIVE FROM Fagor FLOPPY DISK UNIT SEND TO Fagor FLOPPY DISK UNIT RECEIVE FROM GENERAL DEVICE SEND TO GENERAL DEVICE Fagor FLOPPY DISK UNIT DIRECTORY Fagor DELETE FLOPPY DISK UNIT PROGRAM DNC ON OFF SUN hh Ulm 1 In order to use any of these options the DNC mode must be inactive If it is active the upper right hand side of the screen shows DNC press 6 DNC ON OFF to deactivate it the DNC letters disappear With options 0 1 2 and 3 it is possible to transfer machine parameters the decoded M function table and the leadscrew
94. ECUTION OF A PREVIOUSLY STORED OPERATION To do this select the corresponding part program position the cursor over the desired operation and press RECALL The CNC recovers all the values that the operation was stored with and it shows them at the bottom of the screen de Data specific to the operation BEGIN END angles increment etc t Machining conditions F S T spindle turning direction etc ig Finishing pass finishing feedrate finishing tool and safety distances along X and Z Then press to execute the selected operation It is possible to modify any data before pressing if so desired Chapter 7 Section Page WITH PART PROGRAM PART PROGRAM 7 WORKING OG S EXECUTION 7 5 2 TOOL INSPECTION With this option it is possible to interrupt the execution of program P99996 and inspect the tool to check its status and change it if necessary To do this follow these steps a b c d e Press to interrupt the program Press TOOL At this time the CNC executes the miscellaneous function MOS to stop the spindle and it displays the following message on the screen JOG KEYS AVAILABLE OUT Move the tool to the desired position by using the JOG keys Once the tool is out of the way the spindle may be started and stopped again by its corresponding keys at the Operator Panel Once the tool inspection or replacement is completed press END The CNC will execute an M03 or M04 fu
95. FAGOR 800T CNC OPERATING MANUAL Ref 9701 in ABOUT THE INFORMATION IN THIS MANUAL This manual is addressed to the machine operator Itincludes the necessary information for new users as well as advanced subjects for those who are already familiar with the 800T CNC product It may not be necessary to read this whole manual Consult the list of New Features and Modifications This manual explains all the functions of the 800T CNC family Consult the Comparison Table for the models in order to find the specific ones offered by your CNC Chapters 1 2 3 and 4 show how to operate with this CNC This CNC permits machining the Profile of a part chapter 6 or perform a series of Automatic Operations detailed in chapter 5 All these machining operations may be carried out in two Ways Semi automatically where the operator controls the movements Automatically Cycle level where the operator programs the operation and the CNC executes it automatically Chapter 7 Working with Part programs shows how to create parts consisting of Profiles and Automatic Operations The Part programs are stored in the internal CNC memory and may be sent out to a peripheral device or PC Chapter 8 Programming examples shows how to edit several part programs There is also an appendix on error codes which indicates some of the probable reasons which could cause each one of them Notes The information described in this manual may be
96. Function G07 may also be programmed as G7 T EA ES Chapter 5 Section Page PATH CONTROL ROUND CORNER G05 1 SQUARE CORNER G07 5 3 RAPID POSITIONING G00 Movements programmed after GOO are carried out at the maximum speed set by the corresponding machine parameters When two axes move simultaneously the resulting path is a straight line from the beginning point to the end point at the feedrate of the slower axis When programming G00 the last programmed F is not canceled Therefore when programming G01 G02 or G03 afterwards the CNC recovers that F and applies it Machine parameter P4 determines whether the Manual Feedrate Override MFO is ignored being fixed at 100 or not thus being able to apply between 0 and 100 override The G00 code freezes the current tool radius compensation G41 G42 without effect until a G01 G02 or G03 is programmed again G00 is modal and incompatible with G01 G02 G03 and G33 G00 may also be programmed as G or GO Page Chapter 5 Section 2 PATH CONTROL RAPID POSITIONING G00 5 4 LINEAR INTERPOLATION G01 When executing a G01 the programmed axes move in a straight line from the starting point to the end point at the programmed Feedrate F The CNC calculates the feedrate for each axis so the resulting straight path is carried out at the programmed F Example X X axis programmed in diameter Starting point X40 Z50 30
97. G24 code indicates the end of the subroutine This block cannot contain any other information Atention Subroutines N91 through N99 may not be defined because they are utilized by the CNC The CNC memory may not contain two parametric subroutines with identical ID numbers even if they belong to different programs However itis possible to use the same numberto identify a standard subroutine and a parametric one 9 5 CALLING A PARAMETRIC SUBROUTINE G21 A parametric subroutine may be called upon from any program or other subroutine standard or parametric To do this G21 must be used The structure of a calling block is N4 G21 N2 2 P3 K 5 5 P3 K 5 5 N4 Block number G21 Calling a parametric subroutine N2 2 The two digits to the left of the period identify the subroutine being called upon 00 through 99 The two digits to the right of the period indicate the number of times that subroutine is to be executed 00 through 99 The number of times may also be programmed by an arithmetic parameter between PO and P255 For example N4 G21 N10 P123 If the number of times is not programmed the CNC will execute it only once P3 Number of the arithmetic parameter P00 P254 K Value assigned to the arithmetic parameter Atention When concluding the execution of the parametric subroutine G24 the parameters recover the values assigned to them in the calling block even when they have been se
98. G96 By programming a N4 G92 S4 type block the spindle rpm is limited to the indicated S4 value The CNC calculates at all times the required spindle rpm for the programmed CSS value m min or inches min If the calculated spindle rpm exceed the G92 S4 limit the CNC will set the actual spindle speed to this maximum value Page Chapter 4 Section 4 ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS SPINDLE SPEED AND SPINDLE ORIENTATION S 43 TOOL PROGRAMMING T The tool to be used is programmed by means of code T2 2 The two digits to the left of the decimal point indicate the tool number to be selected The two decimals indicate the tool offset number to be applied Up to 32 tools T1 through T32 and 32 tool offsets Txx 1 through Txx 32 may be programmed The T function may be programmed in the following ways T2 2 The CNC selects the indicated tool and assumes the values of the indicated tool offset T2 The CNC selects the indicated tool and assumes the values of the same offset number as the indicated tool number For example T19 19 may also be programmed as T19 T 2 The CNC does not change the tool but assumes the values of the indicated tool offset number The CNC always applies the tool length values X Z I K stored in the tool offset table When programming G41 or G42 the CNC applies the corresponding R value stored in the tool offset table If no T has been programmed the CNC applies the T
99. HINING CANNED CYCLES This CNC offers the following machining canned cycles G67 NO G67 NI G67 N2 G67 N3 G67 N4 G67 N5 G67 N6 G67 N7 G67 N8 G66 G68 G69 G81 G82 G84 G85 G86 Turning Facing Taper turning Threadcutting Rounding Grooving Multiple drilling Simple drilling tapping Slot milling along X or Z Pattern repeat not accessible from the keyboard Stock removal along X not accessible from the keyboard Stock removal along Z not accessible from the keyboard Turning of straight sections not accessible from the keyboard Facing of straight sections not accessible from the keyboard Turning of curved sections not accessible from the keyboard Facing of curved sections not accessible from the keyboard Longitudinal treadcutting canned cycle not accessible from the keyboard Parameters related to the canned cycles The canned cycles may alter the values of parameters PO through P99 On power up after a Reset and every time the execution mode of P99996 is quit the CNC updates resets the following arithmetic parameters P190 P191 P201 P24 X coordinate of the tool change position set by the machine manufacturer Z coordinate of the tool change position set by the machine manufacturer Work units 0 mm 1 inches Work units 0 Radus 1 Diameter When programming the canned cycles if the value being assigned to a parameter is a constant write K after the sign For example N
100. IC TAPER TURNING CYCLE mode 8050403 The CNC displays the selected values and allows to select new ones if so desired The following data can also be defined 9 Indicates the final diameter to be obtained in the turning operation Indicates the turning pass and it is given by a positive radius value If 0 is programmed the CNC will use the N value Defines the number of roughing passes When completed the CNC will run the finishing pass This parameter will be taken into account when 0 Defines the angle of the chamfer with respect to the Z axis Defines the slope of the chamfer Since there is no key to select it press the one corresponding to another data for example amp and then press the down arrow key to select the data When the operator defines Q or the CNC will update both values The CNC in order to obtain a good part finish applies tool compensation on the last machining pass and to do so it needs to know the type of profile to be machined the bottom of the screen shows the currently selected type of profile use the up and down arrow keys to select another one if so desired 8050404 Page 16 Chapter 5 Section AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS TAPER TURNING If a finishing pass has been set 96A other than 0 the CNC behaves as follows Example 1 To remove 20 mm with a pass of A 2 With A 50 The CNC runs ten 1 9mm passes plus a 1mm f
101. IMULATION P99996 3 10 1 EXECUTION OF PROGRAM P99996 When selecting the option Execution of program P99996 the CNC displays the following information AUTOMATIC P99996 N0000 NOO G90 N10 G94 N20 T1 1 N30 F2000 COMMAND ACTUAL TO GO X 0000 000 X 0000 000 X 0000 000 Z 0000 000 Z 0000 000 Z 0000 000 S 0000 S 0000 RPM F0000 000 100 S0000 100 T00 00 G05 01 95 M41 The top line shows the message AUTOMATIC the program number P99996 and the number of the first block of the program or that of the block being in execution Then the CRT shows the contents of the first program blocks If the program is being executed the first block of the list will be the one being executed at the time The position values along X and Z indicate the programmed values COMMAND the current position ACTUAL and the distance remaining TO GO for the axes to reach the command position It also shows the selected spindle speed programmed value multiplied by the active S override COMMAND and the real spindle speed ACTUAL The bottom of the screen shows the machining conditions currently selected The programmed feedrate F the F override the programmed spindle speed S the S override the programmed Tool as well as the active G and M functions To execute program P99996 proceed as follows Select if so desired the first block to be executed indicated at the upper right hand corner by default N0000 by keyin
102. K the previous tool length values X Z are replaced by the new ones and their corresponding wear values I or K or both are set to zero Tf either Ix2 3 or I 2 3 K 2 3 is programmed after G50 T2 these values are added to or subtracted from their previous values Atention N The block containing function G50 cannot have any other type of information Page Chapter 4 Section ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS TOOL PROGRAMMING T 4 3 2 CORRECTING TOOL DIMENSIONS G51 By means of function G51 it is possible to alter the I K values of the active tool currently in use without changing the values stored in the tool offset table Format N4 G51 144 3 K 4 3 in mm N4 G51 I 3 4 K 3 4 in inches N4 Block number a 1 Modifying code Value to be added to or subtracted from the I value currently applied to the current tool length K Value to be added to or subtracted from the K value currently applied to the current tool length These values do not alter the tool table which means that the next time the same tool is used the CNC will assume again the I K values of the table ignoring the correction values programmed by G51 A block containing function G51 cannot have any other type of information Chapter 4 Section Page ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS TOOL PROGRAMMING T 9 44 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS M The auxiliary functions are programmed by means of the M2 code Up
103. MATIC OPERATIONS INTRODUCTION 3 5 1 3 SIMULATION When selecting the Automatic mode Cycle it is possible to check an automatic operation in dry run before executing it To do this press at the compact model and at the modular model The screen shows a graphic page The lower left hand side of the screen shows the axes of the plane To define the display area proceed as follows Press smut at the compact model and at the modular model Indicate the XZ coordinates of the position to be displayed at the center of the screen Set the width of the display area After keying in each value press ENTER Se ind To check the part press This will start the corresponding graphic simulation Press CLEAR to clear the screen and END to quit the simulation mode Page Chapter 5 Section 4 AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS INTRODUCTION 5 1 3 1 ZOOM FUNCTION With this function it is possible to enlarge or reduce the whole graphic representation or part of it To do this the simulation of the program must be either interrupted or finished Press Z The screen will show a rectangle over the original drawing This rectangle represents the new display area to be enlarged or reduced To change the dimensions of the rectangle use these keys Reduces the size of the rectangle zoom in Increases the size of the rectangle zoom out Use the following keys to move the zoom window around
104. MATIC OPERATIONS MULTIPLE DRILLING 5 10 SLOT MILLING With this operation it is possible to mill radial slots on the face of the part same Z coordinate different X coordinate as well as parallel to the part s center line on its cylindric side same X coordinate different Z coordinate To access this operation proceed as follows Press faux select option 6 Other cycles and then Slot Milling When in DRO mode press or LEVEL and select the Slot Milling option Once the new cycle has been selected The CNC will display the following data The CNC shows this cycle when having spindle orientation and live tool Once selected the CNC will show the following type of information F 1000 100 TRPM 1500 100 T3 Machining feedrate G94 m min Percentage of Feedrate Override Live tool RPM Live tool speed override if P609 8 1 Slot milling tool 8051001 The CNC will show the BEGIN and END values currently available New ones may be selected if so desired The following data must also be defined a Angular position of first slot A Angular increment between slots N Number of slots to be milled To set the safety distances along X and Z press the CNC will display a new menu After setting both values press p or To quit this operation proceed as follows LEVE A Press or to return to the Other automatic operations menu Press or again to return to the DRO mode C
105. MP CALL G25 Example NO G00 X10 N5 Z20 N10 G01 X50 M3 N15 G00 ZO N20 X0 N25 G25 NO 20 8 N30 M30 When reaching N25 the CNC jumps to NO and executes the section NO through N20 eight times It then returns to N30 The preparatory functions corresponding to the conditional jumps calls G26 G27 G28 G29 and G30 will be described in the section regarding PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS WITH PARAMETERS later on in this manual Chapter 6 Section Page ADDITIONAL PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS UNCONDITIONAL 3 JUMP CALL G25 64 ELECTRONIC THREADING G33 By using function G33 itis possible to program and perform longitudinal facial and taper threading In order to be able to use this feature a rotary encoder must be mounted on the spindle G33 is modal and therefore will remain active until canceled by GOO GO1 G02 G03 M02 M30 EMERGENCY or RESET Longitudinal threading Its programming format is N4 G33 Z 4 3 K3 4 where N4 Block number G33 Threading code Z Final Z coordinate of the thread K Thread pitch along the Z axis The Z coordinate will be either absolute or incremental depending on whether in G90 or G91 The axis feedrate cannot be overridden while in G33 by means of the MFO switch and the CNC will apply 100 of the programmed F The spindle rpm cannot be overridden either by the spindle override keys Facial threading Spiral Its programming format is N4 G33 X 4 3
106. O OFFSETS G53 G59 By means of functions G53 G54 G55 G56 G57 G58 and G59 it is possible to operate with 7 different zero offsets These offset values are stored in the CNC memory and are referred to machine reference zero home To access the zero offset table G53 G59 press Once the table is displayed it is possible to clear all the offsets by pressing Functions G53 G59 must be used to load a zero offset into the table or to apply one of them on the running program Loading a zero offset into the table Absolute value loading To load the values set by X Z into the desired table address G53 G59 Format N4 G53 G59 X 4 3 Z 4 3 in mm N4 G53 G59 X 3 4 Z 3 4 in inches N Block number G Zero offset code G53 through G59 X Zero offset value referred to home for the X axis Z Zero offset value referred to home for the Z axis Incremental value loading To increment the existing zero offset values G53 G59 by a set amount I K Format N4 G53 G59 I 4 3 K 4 3 in mm N4 G53 G59 I 3 4 K 3 4 in inches N Block number G Zero offset code G53 through G59 I Amount to be added to the previously stored X axis zero offset value Amount to be added to the previously stored Z axis zero offset value Apply a particular pre defined zero offset onto the running program Format N4 G53 G59 It applies a zero offset according to the values stored at the indicated table address G53 G59 onto the program curre
107. O39 0 When this feature is disabled PLC output O39 is setto 0 and the handwheels operate like until now as on previous versions DYNAMIC GRAPHICS WHILE IN EXECUTION Until now with the 800T CNC a part program could be simulated verified graphically before running it From now on it is also possible to display dynamic graphics of the machining path while in execution Requirements This application requires a 800TG or 800TGI CNC model G for graphics Operation When running an Automatic Operation a Part program the ISO coded program in Automatic or Single Block mode itis now possible to display the machining path dynamically in the execution stage To do this once the execution has started the following keys may be pressed 4 The CNC displays the graphics screen 3 The CNC shows the Command Actual and To go coordinates of the axes and at the top of the screen the values of the Arithmetic parameters 2 The CNC displays the Following Error axis lag in large characters 1 The CNC displays the actual axis position in large characters 0 The CNC returns to the standard display 3 WORK ZONE EXCLUSION ZONE With this feature it is possible to select a predefined zone as work zone or exclusion zone from the PLCI Requirements This application requires an 800TI or 800TGI CNC model since one must use outputs O46 and O47 of the PLCI to set the zone as work zone or exclusion zone Parameter set
108. ON S 3 4 2 2 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED S IN m min or feet min G96 From the moment G96 is programmed the CNC assumes the spindle speed S4 to be in m min feet min and the lathe goes into Constant Surface Speed mode of operation The CNC assumes the currently selected spindle speed range gear as the active one If none is selected the desired one must be programmed in the same block M41 M42 M43 M44 If no range is either selected or programmed in the block containing G96 the CNC will issue error 10 This error will not be issued when the machine only uses a single spindle range gear In that case the CNC executes function M41 to select it It is recommended to program both G96 and the spindle speed S4 in the same block If only G96 is programmed the CNC assumes as the CSS speed the last CSS speed used in that operating mode If there is no previous CSS value the CNC issues error 10 If the first movement after a G96 is made in rapid GOO the CNC calculates the spindle rpm using the final diameter of that movement as part diameter If the first movement after a G96 is made in G01 G02 or G03 the CNC calculates the spindle rpm using the diameter value when G96 was executed G96 is modal and thus will remain active until G97 is programmed 4 2 3 SPINDLE SPEED S LIMIT FOR CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED G92 By using G92 it is possible to limit the maximum spindle speed when operating at Constant Surface Speed in
109. P103 K 17 P6 K14 P19 K0 5 P20 K0 5 N125 G67 N5 Grooving N130 GO X80 Z50 Goes to tool change position N131 T3 3 3Selects tool 3 N140 P4 K0 7 P11 K0 P16 K0 P128 K0 _ Pitch outside thread angle N141 P100 K28 P101 K 70 P102 K28 P103 K 86 P8 K1 5 P14 K0 919 P19 K8 P20 K1 N145 G67 N3 Thread N150 P4 K0 7 P11 K0 P16 K0 P128 K0 _ Pitch outside thread angle N151 P100 K16 P101 K0 P102 K16 P103 K 16 P8 K1 P14 K0 613 P19 K15 P20 K1 N155 G67 N3 Thread N160 GO X80 Z50 Goest to withdrawal point N170 M30 End of program 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 025 026 027 This error occurs when the first character of the block to be executed is not an N Too many digits when defining a function in general A negative value has been assigned to a function which does not accept the sign or an incorrect value has been given to a canned cycle parameter A canned cycle has been defined while function G02 G03 or G33 was active Parametric block programmed wrong There are more than 10 parameters affected in a block Division by zero Square root of a negative number Parameter value too large The range or the Constant Surface Speed has not been programmed More than 7 M functions in a block This error occurs in the following cases Function G50 is programmed wrong
110. P23 and P26 which may be used in later cycles However it does modify the values of the basic parameters defining the cycle 4 The basic operation is described in detail in the Operating manual 5 The exit conditions are GOO and G90 Chapter 8 Section Page MACHINING CANNED CYCLES uu c o E 15 8 8 SIMPLE DRILLING CANNED CYCLE G67 N7 TAPPING CANNED CYCLE G67 N7 These two cycles are defined in a similar way Their only difference is parameter P8 pitch or maximum depth P P must be set to 0 for tapping and to any other value for simple drilling Rapid movement Movement at F Basic parameters defining a cycle P101 Zcoordinate of the BEGIN point P103 Z coordinate of the END point P8 Indicates the pitch or maximum pecking distance P chip removal P8 must be set to 0 for tapping and to any other value for simple drilling P13 Sets the time the drill bit will remain at the bottom of the hole Itis given in seconds Therefore P13 K1 5 means 1 5 seconds P19 Safety distance along the X axis in radius P20 Safety distance along the Z axis Page Chapter 8 Section 16 MACHINING CANNED CYCLES SIMELE DRILCING G67 N7 General concepts 1 2 The machining conditions feedrate spindle speed etc must be programmed before calling the cycle These parameters must be programmed in the block before the one calling the cycle N2 F10 S1000 M03 N
111. PC the menu option Program Management Receive Digitizing Atthe CNC selectthe operation or place the cursor on the part program header PART 01435 A listing ofthe operations it consists of must appear Press AUX 8 The CNC will display the graphic simulation screen Press Ty The CNC starts simulating the part and generating program 99996 When done with the simulation the 99996 program generated at the PC will contain all the blocks simulated by the CNC in ISO code This program can be executed at the CNC through the menu option Execute infinite program of the DNC30 4 MACHINE SAFETY REGULATION This CNC offers the following features to comply with machine safety regulations Enabling of the CYCLE START key from the PLC This feature is available when machine parameter P619 7 1 PLC output O25 indicates whether the CYCLE START key is enabled 21 or not 20 Axes movements affected by Feed Hold It was already available Feed Hold input pin 15 of connector I O 1 must be normally high If while moving the axes the Feed Hold input is brought low the CNC keeps the spindle turning and stops the axes with OV or velocity command analog signal and keeping their enables ON When this signal is brought back up the CNC will resume the movement of the axes Axes jogging feedrate limited by PLC This feature is available when machine parameter P619 7 1 When activating PLC out
112. POSITION Axes out of position means that they are not at the position where the execution was interrupted Jog the axes to the point of interruption by means the corresponding jog keys The CNC will not allow to move them passed overtravel this position When the axes are in position the screen will display RETURN AXES OUT OF POSITION NONE Press to resume the execution of the automatic operation Chapter 5 Section Page AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS INTRODUCTION 7 5 2 TURNING This option is selected by pressing and it makes it possible to turn the programmed section To select either the Semiautomatic or the Automatic Cycle mode press Or at the compact model 5 2 1 SEMI AUTOMATIC TURNING X END BEGIN 8050201 It uses the BEGIN and END values The CNC displays the selected values and allows to select new ones if so desired The X axis movements will be made by means of either a mechanical handwheel the electronic handwheel or the JOG keys on the operator panel The Z axis movements will be carried out by using the following keystroke sequences Moves the Z axis only up to the BEGIN point Moves the Z axis only up to the END point Page Chapter 5 Section 8 AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS TURNING 5 2 2 AUTOMATIC TURNING CYCLE mode 8050202 The CNC displays the selected values and lets select new ones if so desired The following data can also be defin
113. POSITION NONE f Press to resume the execution of program P99996 Page Chapter 3 Section 18 AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS EXECUTION SIMULATION P99996 3 10 1 2 EXECUTION MODES With this CNC it is possible to execute program P99996 from beginning to end or one block at a time by pressing The top line of the screen shows the operating mode currently selected either Automatic or Single Block To switch from one mode to the other press again Once the execution mode has been selected press 3 10 1 3 CNC RESET With this option it is possible to reset the CNC setting it to the initial conditions established by the machine parameters When quitting this operating mode the CNC displays the DRO mode To reset the CNC simply interrupt the program execution if running and press The CNC will request confirmation of this function by blinking the message RESET To go ahead with reset press again but to cancel it press 3 10 1 4 DISPLAYING PROGRAM BLOCKS To display the previous or following blocks to those appearing on the screen press e Displays the previous blocks o Displays the following blocks Atention Bear in mind that P99996 always starts executing from the currently selected starting block regardless of the blocks currently displayed on the screen By default this starting block is NOOO To select another starting block press N block number RECALL For example N110 RECALL
114. PROGRAMMING T Code 4 P Code 5 P wm 7 S Code 6 XF P me PA Code 7 X m 7 Code 8 xc gt DP P Tool Tip C Tool Center d e a Code 4 ix 7 Code 3 x rum C3 Code 2 ip Code 1 x SES Code 8 NUM Chapter 4 ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS Section TOOL PROGRAMMING T Page 4 3 1 LOADING TOOL DIMENSIONS INTO TOOL TABLE G50 By means of function G50 it is possible to enter or edit the dimensions ofthe various tools in the tool offset table G50 may be programmed in several ways a b Loading all the dimensions of a tool By programming N4 G50 T2 X 4 3 Z 4 3 F1 R4 3 142 3 K 2 3 The values set by X Z F R I K are loaded into the table address indicated by T2 N4 Block number G50 Tool dimensions loading code T Tool table address TO1 T32 X Tool length along the X axis Z Tool length along the Z axis Fl Location code tool shape FO through F9 R Tool radius I Tool wear along the X axis always in diameter K Tool wear along the Z axis The new X Z F R I K values replace the previous ones at position T2 Changing one or more table values Todo this just program those values following G52 T2 the rest of the values remain unchanged When programming this way bear in mind the following considerations If X or Z or both are programmed without I or
115. S o INCHES ARA ARA 1 BAT ES dane uo epi id ed snes E IM CEN MPEG 2 E tmmilinch s ymm lt gt F munucli sWIEV uus rex cna Aaa p ror H 3 iE n 3 ModiDe 3don oF 300 XIEODSIOUR ai ebbe pe PE RR tS PERSE TEE REN UEM S ESEPAHT HERR UMP ES RUP TEPNM M IDUE 3 Tool CAMA ERR TEE TI UT 6 TOOL UL o mA 7 Tool piiss modifita Gi A AAA AA 8 Cycle fimshine pass Salety UI ale uuu esset epA E FAI ei ora p Ra PE ER nR N R EnEn aos 9 Other aBtonialte ODOLRllOfIS a iosiioseepee estet Aia 11 AU TACOS E tO D DT 12 Estatal 13 ESPIAS ti A 13 ENE MIA io 14 Loli ARA AAA MP 15 Execution F Simulation of program PODODO secciones 16 Pxecution ul program FOODS sd 17 Qr oun m d 18 ESO Ra 19 A Ree Te oe RE 19 Dusplayus procram DIOURS ns ARA 19 See WARS m C T 20 PIMUAnON ar plasgram PGA ie 22 LOA TOC TTE 23 Edie program POSS a 24 NENNEN Chapter 4 SPINDLE 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 3 1 4 4 4 4 1 4 4 2 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 Spim GDERABHS mode BEL CHOI a a EES 1 pM ie due cerns aia 2 Constant Surtace Speed CSS onsite in Ra nE a tang unig M EAR REPE MM ADEM I IEEE 3 Constant Surade Speer LIN ani 3 Spindle speed ringe Change si 4 Manual spindle range ghane sinaloa lidad 4 Automate spindle range CBE isse vere ar EREPDU DRE EDDIE asso Hbc nea 4 Clocks unio ci up ia 5 Counterclockwise spindle TOO rne to rho Dieta Rn bL Met uv n SLM E ars Rd CURE 3 DES ROO An 5 equi ui i
116. STOP Same as M00 except that the CNC only takes it into account if the conditional stop input block skip is activated M02 END OF PROGRAM This code indicates end of program and performs a general reset function of the CNC reset to initial conditions It also acts as an M05 As in the case of M00 it is recommended that this function be set so that it is executed at the end of the block in which it is programmed M30 END OF PROGRAM WITH RETURN TO THE BEGINNING Same as M02 except that the CNC goes back to the first block at the beginning of the program It also acts as an M05 M03 CLOCKWISE START OF THE SPINDLE It is recommended that this function be set so that it is executed at the beginning of the block in which it is programmed Page Chapter 4 Section 10 ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS M M04 COUNTER CLOCKWISE START OF THE SPINDLE Same as M03 except that the spindle rotates in the opposite direction M05 SPINDLE STOP It is recommended that this be set so that the CNC executes it at the end of the block in which it is programmed M10 M11 ASSOCIATED TO EXTERNAL DEVICE O1 M12 M13 ASSOCIATED TO EXTERNAL DEVICE O2 M14 M15 ASSOCIATED TO EXTERNAL DEVICE O3 Codes associated to the keys corresponding to the external devices O1 O2 and O3 Codes M10 MI2 and M14 activate their corresponding outputs and codes M11 M13 and M15 deactivate them M19 SPINDLE ORIENTATION If
117. Section Page PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES EXAMPLE 2 13 De BEGIN X16 ZO Q Zoe aya U 14 BEGIN X28 Z 85 ZA END X28 Z 87 AF 26 5 X N 1 Z TW 2 T T 2 F CSS Page Chapter 8 Section 14 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES EXAMPLE 2 BEGIN X16 Z 15 END X17 2 17 GA ZF X Z T 0 14 N 1 TW 2 T 2 F CSS BEGIN X28 Z 70 ZA END X28 Z 86 ZF P 1 5 X 8 H 1 5x0 613 0 919 4 1 A a T 3 F CSS Chapter 8 Section Page PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES EXAMPLE 2 15 BEGIN X16 ZO RA END X16 Z 16 ZF P 1 X 15 H 0 613 Z 0 A a T 3 F CSS Page Chapter 8 Section 16 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES EXAMPLE 2 EXAMPLE 3 38 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES EXAMPLE 3 Section Page HUMg Qa Me ot SRY l I toot gt I I l L E zu poa ke 21 f 44 y M 3 4 y I tl 1 I 1 f Jo bog l 1 proa ET rio ohhh H pe Liste bee See a aa Ll ex ess EL i torem Pa i ort t MSS Pd jd l riot l NS 1i I E l SS l 1 E 34 1 BQ TAL SSS 1 ko SS io al SN S NN NNN l SSI J BSS G Wy EE SENSN eene ix SS Tween eee NESSSSSSSNS INN SSSSASNNNNN S Caan SAGAN SAAN AL AD END X50 Z 38 BEGIN X50 Z0 4 48 X 1 Z T l I I N N SSS v l SSS v ISSN SAAR ISSN
118. Since there is no key to select it proceed as follows Press TOOL followed by the Z key m Press N followed by the down arrow key To obtain a finishing pass press AUX and set 96A to other than 0 Chapter 5 Section Page AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS GROOVING 35 Basic operation It is possible to perform a grooving operation from beginning to end without interruptions or a pass at a time by pressing Once the proper data has been entered press 1 for the CNC to execute the grooving operation Before starting to execute the CNC will calculate the real pass along the Z axis required for the grooving operation All the passes will be identical The machining steps will be the following 1 The spindle will start at the selected speed and turning direction 2 If the execution of the cycle has been programmed with another tool the CNC will make a tool change by moving the axes to the tool change position if so required by the machine 3 The tool will approach the Begin point maintaining the selected safety distances along the X and Z axes 4 Every grooving pass is carried out as follows a Position the cutter facing the area to be grooved The first time it will be positioned at a TW tool width distance from the BEGIN point The rest of the times it will move the grooving pass b Grooving of the section If there is no finishing pass 96A 0 to the bottom of the groove If there
119. Technical Service Department Internal CNC hardware error Consult with the Technical Service Department Internal CNC hardware error Consult with the Technical Service Department Internal CNC hardware error Consult with the Technical Service Department Parity error in tool table or zero offset table G53 G59 Parity error in general parameters Parity error in Z axis parameters Parity error in X axis parameters Parity error in M table Internal CNC hardware error Consult with the Technical Service Department Internal CNC hardware error Consult with the Technical Service Department This error comes up in the following cases gt A comment has more than 43 characters gt A program has been defined with more than 5 characters gt A block number has more than 4 characters Strange characters in memory Inside temperature limit exceeded Error in Z axis leadscrew error compensation parameters 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 Error in X axis leadscrew error compensation parameters FAGORLAN line error Hardware installed incorrectly FAGORLAN error It comes up in the following instances gt When the configuration of the LAN nodes is incorrect The LAN configuration has been changed One of the nodes is no longer present active When this error occurs access the LAN mode editing or monitoring before executing a program block FAGOR LAN error A node is not ready to work
120. The canned cycle does not alter the call parameters P22 P23 and P26 which may be used in later cycles However it does modify the values ofthe basic parameters defining the cycle The basic operation is described in detail in the Operating manual The exit conditions are GOO and G90 Chapter 8 Section Page MACHINING CANNED CYCLE SLOT MILLING 19 CHINING CANNED CYCLES G67 N8 8 10 PATTERN REPEATING CANNED CYCLE G66 MPT72 Format N4 G66 P0 K P1 K P4 K P5 K P7 K P8 K P9 K P12 K P13 K P14 K Meaning of the parameters P0 X coordinate value of the initial point A in radius or diameter P1 Z coordinate value of the initial point A P4 Total amount of stock to be removed It must be equal to or greater than 0 and equal to or greater than the finishing stock allowance or error 3 will be issued Depending on P12 it will be identified as residual in X or Z P5 Max step It must be greater than zero or error 3 will be issued Depending on P12 it will be identified as step along X or Z axis The real step calculated by the CNC will be equal or smaller than the max step P7 Finishing stock allowance on the X axis It must be equal to or greater than 0 or error 3 will be issued P8 Finishing stock allowance on the Z axis It must be equal to or greater than 0 or error 3 will be issued P9 Feedrateforthe finishing pass If itis O there is no finishing pass If itis negative error
121. The threading operation has the End of thread distance parameter associated to it besides the ones for finishing pass feedrate and safety distances along X and Z This parameter indicates the distance at the end of the thread where it begins the exit from it The CNC keeps threading during this exit movement To set it press AUX and select the Thread Exit Distance option If set to 0 the cutter will retract straight out without any Thread Exit Distance The following data must also be defined P Thread pitch The right hand or left hand threads are done by previously selecting the spindle turning direction If a pitch of 0 is programmed the CNC will issue the corresponding error message H Defines the total depth of the thread with a positive radius value If programmed with a value of 0 the CNC will issue the corresponding error message Since there is no key to select it proceed as follows Press P followed by the down arrow key S Select the P data and assign its corresponding value The CNC will then request the H value Page Chapter 5 Section 32 AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS THREADING A Defines the depth of the threading passes If programmed with a value of 0 the CNC will issue the corresponding error message It is given in radius and the depth of each pass is a function of the corresponding pass number A vn as shown in the next figure CX Defines the tool pene
122. To select the spindle speed rpm for later entry or modification of its value Before pressing this key select the type of spindle speed CSS or rpm Once this value is keyed in it is possible to Press The CNC will assume this value as theoretical spindle speed Press ENTER The CNC will store this value but it does not change the current theoretical spindle speed This option is very useful when editing operations to be stored later To select the new tool Once the new tool has been selected it is possible to Press The CNC selects the new tool Press ENTER The CNC stores this value but it does not select any tool This option is very useful when editing operations to be stored later ENTER To validate the commands generated at the editing window RECALL To recover values previously entered into part programs or CNC tables for later analysis and modification Before pressing this key use the up and down arrow keys to move the cursor and select the operation to be analyzed Chapter 1 Section Page CONCEPTS KEYBOARD DESCRIPTION 3 To delete the last character entered in the editing window To reset the CNC and assume the default values set by machine parameters Also this key must be pressed after modifying the machine parameter values in order for the CNC to assume them During the execution of an automatic operation it is necessary to previously stop its execution The CNC will also requ
123. Z coordinate contained in the block located at the indicated address F20 Memory address location of the block previous to the indicated one F21 Icoordinate contained in the block located at the indicated address F22 K coordinate contained in the block located at the indicated address F23 Selected tool offset number F24 X value of the indicated tool F25 Z value of the indicated tool F26 F value of the indicated tool F27 R value of the indicated tool F28 I value of the indicated tool F29 K value of the indicated tool F30 Logic AND function F31 Logic OR function F32 Logic XOR function F33 Logic NOR function F34 Not being used at this time F35 Not being used at this time F36 Selected tool number Chapter 10 Section Page PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING 1 10 1 ASSIGNMENTS Any value may be assigned to any parameter a b c d e h i y D N4 P1 P2 P1 takes the value of P2 while P2 keeps its original value N4 P1 K1 5 P1 takes the value of 1 5 K indicates that it is a constant Its value range is 99999 99999 N4 P1 H HEXADECIMAL value P1 takes the HEXADECIMAL value indicated after H Possible H values O FFFFFFFF N4 P1 X Pl takes the current theoretical coordinate value of the X axis N4 P1 Z Pl takes the current theoretical coordinate value of the Z axis N4 P1 R Pl takes the value of 1 if machine parameter P11 radius diameter is set for radius and the va
124. ZO END E in BEGIN END BEGIN X35 Z 16 X30 Z 24 6 212 180432 Z 180 T 5 X30 Z 20 6 X 180 Z 212 180432 T 5 9 5 4 ZA 0 ZF 0 X 10 20 0 5 0 4 5 Page 20 Chapter 8 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES Section EXAMPLE 3 P I A p p pp PPP Pg Pg ggg ppp 6011011014111 pp p p Pg MR I YES SINS QS NN N N MN TIONS YO INS ST N A TAR GLI 11 A SO N N 4 A 22A TZ Io pL y 27 ut ALA 7L 4 Gt SIN NS ASS PPS OI OOOO DW H CHAO NS POM II ON S NS NIDO I a l l LEE GIG d ege EN l l l l RSA SS ASS SSM ds OOOO TO 4475 A ppp ptg LL 0444 Trpo gl p opua KATARA Uy E 1011040044111 G 14114111140 04 UMMM YING GY ly oz e o UD WY El Y BEGIN X40 ZO 42 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 X18 X20 X20 X24 X32 X38 X38 X48 Z0 Z 1 Z 12 Z 17 Z 17 4 25 4 35 7 40 R5 R6 R725 Co to Chapter 8 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES Section EXAMPLE 3 Page 21 AAA AAC A AECE gl uuu un UMMA p ppp Ip YY ly AAA ARA ASA GARA 1101116666 gta AA AAA RARA DEP G1 11101006 ty ly ALAA GAG ALL A 1111106666 G14 G41101116664 G4 Ut Cte CAU gg ty ly BEGIN END N TW T CSS X20 Z 9 ZA X20 Z 12 18 X 15 2 Z 2
125. achine does not have an automatic tool changer The CNC must know at all times which tool is being used for machining To achieve this every time a new tool is selected after it has been changed press TOOL followed by the selected tool and then press The CNC will assume all the offset values corresponding to the new selected tool These offset values tool lengths and radius will be taken into account by the CNC when performing any operation from this moment on If a new tool is to be selected when executing a cycle or preprogrammed part the CNC will display a message indicating the number of the new tool to be selected It also interrupts the execution of the program until the tool has been changed and the operator presses the ENTER key Page Chapter 2 Section BASIC OPERATIONS TOOL SELECTION 2 2 1 LIVE TOOL If the machine has a live tool and it is not selected the CNC shows the following type of information F 0100 000 100 RPM 1500 100 T4 Where T4 indicates the tool currently selected To select the live tool press the following keystroke sequence S After which the CNC shows T RPM Enter the rpm value for the live tool Press The CNC activates the live tool and displays the following type of information F 0100 000 100 RPM 1500 100 TRPM 800 T4 Where TRPM indicates the selected live tool speed To select a new live tool speed press S and after keying in the new val
126. act model To do this at the modular model use s Page Chapter 1 Section 4 CONCEPTS KEYBOARD DESCRIPTION 1 2 1 KEYS FOR AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS It consists of the following keys They allow the selection of one of the automatic operations offered by this CNC epi They are used to define the parameters corresponding to the automatic operation that has been selected eg Dj tU Ed e H To select the coordinates of the BEGIN point for later modification or to command the machine to move to that point To select the coordinates of the END point for later modification or to command the machine to move to that point ej El To access the point to point movement mode E E To select the operating mode in the automatic operations Semiautomatic Cycle level 1 and Cycle level 2 at the compact model To do this at the modular model use instead Chapter 1 Section Page CONCEPTS KEYBOARD DESCRIPTION 5 1 2 2 SPECIAL KEYSTROKE SEQUENCES e E This keystroke sequence blanks the CRT out Just press any key to recover the normal display If an error occurs while the CRT is blank it will resume the normal display S With this sequence it is possible to select the angular spindle orienting position S gt The CNC allows this sequence when the Constant Surface Speed CSS mode has been selected and it is used to set the maximum spindle sp
127. actions oroperations may hurt people or damage products gt Symbols that may be carried on the product WARNING symbol Ithas an associated textindicating those actions or operations may hurt people or damage products Electrical Shock symbol Itindicates that point may be under electrical voltage Ground Protection symbol It indicates that point must be connected to the main ground point of the machine as protection for people and units ep Introduction 4 MATERIAL RETURNING TERMS When returning the CNC pack it in its original package and with its original packaging material If not available pack it as follows 1 Getacardboard box whose three inside dimensions are atleast 15 cm 6 inches larger than those of the unit The cardboard being used to make the box must have a resistance of 170 Kg 375 Ib 2 When sending it to a Fagor Automation office for repair attach a label indicating the owner of the unit person to contact type of unit serial number symptom and a brief description of the problem 3 Wrap the unit in a polyethylene roll or similar material to protect it When sending the monitor especially protect the CRT glass 4 Pad the unit inside the cardboard box with poly utherane foam on all sides 5 Sealthe cardboard box with packing tape or industrial staples Introduction 5 FAGOR DOCUMENTATION 800T CNC OEM Manual 800T CNC USER Manual DNC 25 30 Software Manual DNC
128. alue location of the block previous to the one located at P2 F20 does not admit a constant operand Example P1 F20 K4 IS WRONG F21 N4 P1 F21 P2 P1 takes the I coordinate value appearing at the block located in P2 F21 does not admit a constant operand Example P1 F21 K2 IS WRONG F22 N4 P1 F22 P2 P1 takes the K coordinate value appearing at the block located in P2 F22 does not admit a constant operand Example P1 F22 K3 IS WRONG F23 N4P 1 F23 P1 takes the number of the current active tool F24 This function may be programmed in two different ways N4 P9 F24 K2 P9 takes the X value appearing in position 2 of the tool table N4 P8 F24 P12 P8 takes the X value appearing in the tool table position indicated by the value of P12 Chapter 10 Section Page PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING OPERATORS 5 E F17 through F29 F25 This function may be programmed in two different ways N4 P15 F25 K16 P15 takes the Z value appearing in position 16 of the tool table N4 P13 F25 P34 P13 takes the Z value appearing in the tool table position indicated by the value of P34 F26 This function may be programmed in two different ways N4 P6 F26 K32 P6 takes the F value appearing in position 32 of the tool table N4 P14 F26 P15 P14 takes the F value appearing in the tool table position indicated by the value of P15 F27 This function may be programmed in two different ways N4 P90 F27 K13 P90 takes the R value appear
129. any point of the part In order to work in the incremental mode it is necessary that the coordinate values displayed by the CNC be incremental lamp on If it is not on press this key On the other hand the CNC shows at all times to the right of the main window the type of coordinates being selected ABS INC Atention Every time the incremental mode is selected the CNC takes as Floating Zero the Part Zero point currently active Therefore it will keep showing the same X Z position values To set another Floating Zero another coordinate or Part Zero must be preset From that moment on the coordinates shown by the CNC will be referred to the new Floating Zero established The CNC keeps the Part Zero preset when working in absolute mode and it will display the X Z position referred to it when switching back from incremental to absolute mode Chapter 1 Section Page CONCEPTS OPERATION IN 11 INCREMENTAL MODE 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 2 1 AXIS FEEDRATE SETTING With this CNC it is possible to set the feedrate F for the axes as often as desired in order to move them at the proper speed each time Also the Operator Panel has a multi position switch which allows modifying the feedrate during those moves by applying the selected percentage 96 override to the feedrate selected in each case This percentage amount is indicated by the Feedrate Override Switch FEED and it has a range from 0 th
130. apter 6 Section Page PROFILES 1 6 1 PROFILE IN SEMI AUTOMATIC MODE In this mode it is possible to define up to 12 points and later move the axes from point to point The movements are carried out in a straight line between consecutive points that is from P1 to P2 from P2 to P3 and so on 6 1 1 POINT STORAGE To delete the current information on all the points press the keystroke sequence CLEAR ENTER The CNC will set all the points to XO ZO The points must be set one at a time and it is recommended to start out from P1 and continue sequentially Use the up and down arrow keys to select a point which will appear highlighted on the screen Then to assign the desired value to it use one of the following options a Move the axes to the desired position by means of either mechanical handwheels electronic handwheels or the JOG keys on the operator panel Press ENTER The CNC will assign the displayed position value to this point and it will select the next point b Press X key in the desired X value for that point and press ENTER The CNC will assign this value to the X axis without modifying the Z axis value By pressing X ENTER the CNC assigns the value of XO Repeat this operation for the Z axis if so desired Page Chapter 6 Section 2 PROFILES SEMIAUTOMATIC MODE 6 1 2 POINT TO POINT MOVEMENT The CNC moves both axes at the same time interpolating fr
131. at the letter G must be followed by up to 2 digits GO through G99 Meaning that a positive or negative number may follow the letter X or Z by up to 4 integers and up to 3 decimals Meaning that a positive or negative number may follow the letter X or Z by up to 3 integers and up to 4 decimals Referring to axis feedrate indicating that the letter F must be followed by up to 4 digits FO through F9999 when working in mm min or inches min When working in mm rev the format is F3 4 and when in inches rev F2 4 Referring to spindle speed indicating that the letter S must be followed by up to 4 digits SO through 9999 Referring to the work tool indicating that the letter T must be followed by up to 2 integers and two decimals Referring to the miscellaneous functions indicating that the letter M must be followed by up to 2 digits MO through M99 Chapter 1 Section Page PROGRAM WRITING BLOCK CONTENTS 3 1 4 PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS G These functions are programmed by means of the letter G followed by two digits G2 They are always programmed at the beginning of the block and they are used to set the geometry and operating conditions of the CNC I 4 1 G FUNCTION TABLE FOR THIS CNC Function Meaning Section Rapid positioning Linear interpolation Clockwise circular interpolation Counter clockwise circular interpolation Dwell Round corner Circular inte
132. ates that the Auxiliary Modes option is selected 1 bit9 Indicates that the Tool Calibration option is selected 1 bit 10 Indicates that the Multiple Drilling operation is selected 1 bit 11 Indicates that the Simple Drilling Tapping operation is selected 1 bit 12 Indicates that the Slot milling keyway operation is selected 1 bit 13 Indicates that the Tool Inspection mode is selected 1 bit 14 Indicates that the Graphic Simulation mode is selected 21 bit 16 Indicates that the mode for the following cycle parameters Finishing pass finishing feedrate finishing tool and safety distances on X and Z is selected 21 Version 6 8 March 1998 NEW LANGUAGES SWEDISH AND NORWEGIAN The languages that can be selected with machine parameter P99 are Spanish P9920 German P99 1 English P99 2 French P9923 Italian P9924 Portuguese P99 5 Taiwanese P99 6 Swedish P99 7 Norwegian P99 8 1000 LINE ENCODER AS 1250 LINE AS ENCODER This feature permits the CNC adapt a 1000 line encoder to be used as 1250 line encoder P623 7 Adapts the X axis feedback encoder O No 1 Yes P623 8 Adapts the Z axis feedback encoder O No 1 Yes A typical case Having a 1000 line for a5 mm pitch ballscrew The calculations necessary to set the axis resolution will be made with the selected pulses 1000 or 1250 CROSS COMPENSATION 4 Cross compensation is used for compens
133. ating the measuring error suffered by the X axis when moving the Z axis P623 6 Cross compensation applied on to the X axis O No 1 Yes When using cross compensation no leadscrew compensation may be applied on the X axis only on to the Z axis since its corresponding table is being used for cross compensation with the following values POO X n P01 DX 70 7 0 in order to properly apply cross compensation set P605 2 1 and P623 6 1 Note The cross compensation table must meet the same requirements as those for the leadscrew error compensation See section 3 8 4 of the installation manual PLCI INPUT 1104 When the Feedrate Override Switch on the operator panel is set on one of the handwheel positions x1 x10 x 100 input 1104 is set to 1 11 Fagor Automation S Coop Mondrag n Spain Fagor Automation Catalunya Barcelona Spain Fagor Industriecommerz GmbH G ppingen Germany Fagor Italia S R L Cassina de Pecchi Milano Italy Fagor Automation Systemes Clermont Ferrand France Fagor Automation Suisse S r l Renan Belgium Fagor Automation Ltda Lega da Palmeira Potugal Fagor Automation Asia Ltd Hong Kong China P R Fagor Automation Asia Ltd Taichung Taiwan Fagor Automation S Pte Ltd Singapore Beijing Fagor Automation Equipment Co Ltd Beijing China P R Fagor Automation Shanghai Rep Office Shanghai China P R Fagor Automation do Brasil C
134. back signals are divided by two Examples for the X axis so the CNC assumes 100 pulses turn with 25 50 and 100 line handwheels 25 line Fagor handwheel P602 4 0 and P621 4 0 25 x 4 1 100 lines 50 line Fagor handwheel P602 4 1 and P621 4 0 50 x 2 1 100 lines 100 line Fagor handwheel P602 4 1 and P621 4 1 100 x 2 2 100 lines Version 5 6 June 1996 1 JOG WITH MASTER HANDWHEEL With this feature it is possible to jog the machine with the Master Handwheel once the path has been defined Requirements The control of the Jog with Master Handwheel is carried out with the Second Handwheel Therefore the machine must have two electronic handwheels and none mechanical Parameter setting Machine parameter P622 6 indicates whether this feature is being used or not P622 6 P622 6 0 Jog with Master handwheel is not available 1 Jog with Master handwheel is available As stated above the control of the Jog with Master Handwheel is carried out with the Second Handwheel Therefore the machine must have two electronic handwheels and none mechanical This means that P621 7 1 The machine does not use mechanical handwheels P622 3 0 It uses two electronic handwheels P609 1 0 The first handwheel is not a FAGOR 100P model The Master handwheel is connected via connector A4 It admits both sine wave and square wave differential signals This implies setting the following machine parameters as follows
135. begin with a NULL character ASCII 00 followed by 96 program number for example 9023256 and a LINE FEED character LF Blank spaces the carriage return key and the sign are ignored The program must end with either 20 NULL characters ASCII 00 or with one ESCAPE character or with one EOT character Press CL to cancel the transmission The CNC will issue the message PROCESS ABORTED FLOPPY DISK UNIT DIRECTORY This option displays the programs stored on the disk inserted in the FAGOR Floppy Disk Unit and the number of characters size of each one of them It also shows the number of free characters available free memory space on the tape DELETE FLOPPY DISK UNIT PROGRAM With this option it is possible to delete a program contained at the FAGOR Floppy Disk Unit The CNC requests the number of the program to be deleted After keying in the desired number press ENTER Once the program has been deleted the CNC will display the message PROGRAM NUM P____ DELETED It also shows the number of free characters on the disk free memory space 7 8 2 DNC COMMUNICATIONS To be able to use this feature the DNC communication must be active the upper right hand side of the screen shows DNC To do this the corresponding parameters must be set accordingly by the manufacturer and option 6 of the Peripherals mode selected if it was not active Once active and by using the FAGORDNC application so
136. block containing a circular interpolation is N4 G02 G03 X 4 3 Z 4 3 144 3 K 4 3 NA Block number G02 G03 Interpolation code Xx43 X coordinate of the end point of the arc Z 4 3 Z coordinate of the end point of the arc 144 3 Distance from the starting point to the center of the arc along the X axis K 4 3 Distance from the starting point to the center of the arc along the Z axis The I and K values are programmed with a sign and they must always be programmed even when their values are 0 Page Chapter 5 Section CIRCULAR 1 PATH CONTROL INTERPOLATION G02 G03 The polar coordinate format for a block containing a circular interpolation is N4 G02 G03 A 3 3 144 3 K 4 3 NA Block number G02 G03 Interpolation code A 3 3 Angle with respect to the polar center of the arc s end point 144 3 Distance from the starting point to the center of the arc along the X axis K 4 3 Distance from the starting point to the center of the arc along the Z axis When a circular interpolation is programmed with G02 or G03 the CNC assumes the arc center as the new polar origin In this case even when the X axis is programmed in diameter the I value must always be given in radius If machine parameter P600 3 0 while keeping the rapid jog key Un U Y pressed the CNC applies 200 of the programmed F to a G02 G03 move 5 5 1 PUDOR INTERPOLATION BY PROGRAMMING THE ARC Format In mm G0
137. bol Ithas an associated textindicating those actions or operations may hurt people or damage products Electrical Shock symbol Itindicates that point may be under electrical voltage Ground Protection symbol It indicates that point must be connected to the main ground point of the machine as protection for people and units ep Introduction 4 MATERIAL RETURNING TERMS When returning the CNC pack it in its original package and with its original packaging material If not available pack it as follows 1 Getacardboard box whose three inside dimensions are atleast 15 cm 6 inches larger than those of the unit The cardboard being used to make the box must have a resistance of 170 Kg 375 Ib 2 When sending it to a Fagor Automation office for repair attach a label indicating the owner of the unit person to contact type of unit serial number symptom and a brief description of the problem 3 Wrap the unit in a polyethylene roll or similar material to protect it When sending the monitor especially protect the CRT glass 4 Pad the unit inside the cardboard box with poly utherane foam on all sides 5 Sealthe cardboard box with packing tape or industrial staples Introduction 5 FAGOR DOCUMENTATION 800T CNC OEM Manual 800T CNC USER Manual DNC 25 30 Software Manual DNC 25 30 Protocol Manual PLCI Manual DNC PLC Manual FLOPPY DISK Manual Introduction 6 FOR THE 800T CNC Is direc
138. cated with besides behaving as those with an they activate the INTERNAL EMERGENCY OUTPUT FAGOR 800T CNC PROGRAMMING MANUAL Ref 9701 ing ABOUT THE INFORMATION IN THIS MANUAL This manual should be used when elaborating an ISO coded program This CNC can store 2 user defined ISO coded programs P99994 Special ISO coded user program to store subroutines P99996 ISO coded user Part program Both programs may be written at a PC and sent out to the CNC The Peripherals section of the Operating Manual describes how to transfer information between the CNC and a PC P99996 may be edited at the CNC but P99994 cannot be accessed from the CNC It must be edited at a PC or peripheral device This manual describes all the information on the ISO code used by the 800T CNC Notes The information described in this manual may be subject to variations due to technical modifications FAGOR AUTOMATION S Coop Ltda reserves the right to modify the contents of the manual without prior notice INDEX Section Page Comparison Table for FAGOR 800T CNCE models eeiam nece ix New Features And modifications nda xiii INTRODUCTION Sariy COO dV REUNIR o EE RO 3 Matenal Reta TENAS aussen a ek ar PHAR LE dia 5 Fagor Documentation far the SOOM CNC asus alacena 6 Mamas ue meet C TD i Me DpGCGBAM WRITING C hapter 1 PROGRAM WRITING 1 1 C NC BEOBPAI SODIO sn brad 1 1 2 AE MEDIE id 2 1 2 1 Condiuousl block
139. ces X and Z 4 Depending on the value assigned to H the profile roughing operation will be performed as follows If programmed with a positive value the CNC will carry out successive roughing passes parallel to the programmed profile and maintaining the tool angle QT at the beginning point of the profile as well as when Page 12 exiting it Chapter 6 Section PROFILES AUTOMATIC MODE CYCLE If programmed with a 0 value the CNC will perform a single finishing pass no roughing passes If programmed with a negative value the roughing operation will be a turning or facing operation Also if a profile with valleys is defined the CNC will issue the corresponding error 5 Once the roughing operation is completed the CNC will run the finishing pass and it will end at the cycle calling point The feedrate for the finishing pass is set by the of the programmed feedrate selected at the time 6 The CNC will stop the spindle Atention It must be borne in mind that the CNC applies tool radius compensation while machining the profile in order to obtain the proper part finish It is necessary to indicate on the tool offset table the cutter tip radius value as well as the location code tool shape of the tool to machine with When only a single pass is desired use one of these two methods gt Program H 0 gt Program A H and parameters A 0 and F 0
140. ck c Semiautomatic Rounding Operation The Semiautomatic Rounding operation starts when turning the Master Handwheel From that momenton the first hand wheel is inoperative When stopping the Master Handwheel the execution is interrupted When turning the Master handwheel again execution is resumed The turning direction of the handwheel cannot be changed When the operation is over the CNC ignores the turning of the Master Handwheel for 1 4 seconds Thus preventing another operation from being started After this time when the Master Handwheel is turned the CNC starts executing a new operation in the indicated direction d Semiautomatic Taper Turning Operation The Semiautomatic Taper Turning Operation starts when turning the Master Handwheel From that moment on the first handwheel is inoperative When stopping the Master Handwheel the execution is interrupted When turning the Master handwheel again execution is resumed When turning the Master Handwheel in the opposite direction the operation is over A new turn of the Master Handwheel in any direction implies the execution of a new operation in the indicated direction 3j SOFTWARE VERSION OF THE CNC From this version on when accessing the EPROM checksum screen Auxiliary Modes Special Modes 8 The CNC will show the checksum of each EPROM and the Software version of the CNC For example Version 6 1 Version 6 4 May 1997 1 TOOL CHANGE INDICATOR FOR THE PLC 19
141. ctangle over the original drawing This rectangle represents the new display area to be enlarged or reduced To change the dimensions of the rectangle use these keys Reduces the size of the rectangle zoom in Increases the size of the rectangle zoom out Use the following keys to move the zoom window around At the compact model 4 OE Im At the modular model 0 e gt To set the area selected with the zoom window as he new display area press ENTER To see he selected area enlarged or reduced while keeping the previous display area values press at the compact model and at the modular model The area contained in the zoom window will now fill the whole screen To return to the previous display area prior to the zoom press END To use the zoom again just press Z and proceed as before To quit the ZOOM function and return to the graphic representation press END Chapter 3 Section Page AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS EXECUTION SIMULATION 23 P99996 3 11 EDITING PROGRAM 99996 Program 99996 is a special ISO coded user program It can be edited either in this operating mode or at a PC and then sent out to this CNC To select this option press AUX and after selecting Auxiliary Modes press the key corresponding to EDITING PROGRAM P99996 The CNC displays the editing page for this program If the program is currently being edited the CNC shows a group of program blocks lines
142. cted to the same AC power line as this equipment Nearby portable transmitters Radio telephones Ham radio transmitters Nearby radio TC transmitters Nearby arc welding machines Nearby High Voltage power lines Etc Ambient conditions The working temperature must be between 5 C and 45 C 41 F and 113 F The storage temperature must be between 25 C and 70 C 13 F and 158 F Introduction 3 Protections of the unit itsel Central Unit It carries two fast fuses of 3 15 Amp 250V to protect the mains AC input All the digital inputs and outputs are protected by an external fast fuse F of 3 15 Amp 250V againsta voltage overload greater than 33Vdc and against reverse connection of the power supply Monitor The type of protection fuse depends on the type of monitor See the identification label of the unit itself Precautions during repair Do not manipulate the inside of the unit Only personnel authorized by Fagor Automation may manipulate the inside of this unit Donotmanipulate the connectors with the unit connected to AC power Before manipulating the connectors inputs outputs feedback etc make sure that the unit is not connected to AC power Safety symbols Symbols which may appear on the manual WARNING symbol Ithasanassociated text indicating those actions oroperations may hurt people or damage products gt Symbols that may be carried on the product WARNING sym
143. ctor Number of pulses 250 Con P602 6 1 and P620 5 21 x1 multiplying factor Number of pulses 500 12
144. current work units in radius or diameter P135 Z coordinate of the tool withdrawal point at the end of the cycle The CNC considers P134 and P135 if the manufacturer has not set a tool change position General concepts I 2 The machining conditions feedrate spindle speed etc must be programmed before calling the cycle These parameters must be programmed in the block before the one calling the cycle N2 F10 S1000 M03 N4 P100 K P101 K P102 K P103 K P4 K P19 K P20 K N6 G67 N1 The canned cycle does not alter the call parameters P22 P23 and P26 which may be used in later cycles However it does modify the values of the basic parameters defining the cycle The basic operation is described in detail in the Operating manual The exit conditions are GOO and G90 Chapter 8 Section Page MACHINING CANNED CYCLES FACING 5 G67 N1 8 8 TAPER TURNING CANNED CYCLE G67 N2 Basic parameters defining a cycle P100 X coordinate of the BEGIN point in the selected units in radius or diameter P101 Z coordinate of the BEGIN point P4 Turning pass D It must have a positive radius value If programmed with a 0 value the CNC will assume parameter P5 number of roughing passes If both P4 and P5 are equal to 0 the CNC will issue the corresponding message P6 Final diameter f to be obtained in the turning operation P7 Slope of the taper P7
145. cycle G67 N7 Multiple drilling canned cycle G67 N8 Slot milling canned cycle G68 Roughing canned cycle along the X axis G69 Roughing canned cycle along the Z axis G70 Inch programming G71 Metric programming in mm G72 Scaling factor G74 Machine Reference Home search G75 Probing G81 Turning canned cycle for straight sections G82 Facing canned cycle for straight sections Turning canned cycle for circular sections G85 Facing canned cycle for circular sections G86 Longitudinal threadcutting canned cycle Programming in absolute coordinates Programming in incremental coordinates Coordinate preset Maximum S value limit setting Polar origin preset Axis feedrate F in mm min 0 1 inch min Axis feedrate F in mm rev 0 1 inch rev S speed in m min ft min Constant Surface Speed S speed in rev min M means MODAL In other words that once the G function has been executed it remains active until another incompatible G function M02 M30 EMERGENCY or RESET is executed or the CNC is turned off and back on D means BY DEFAULT That is that they will be assumed by the CNC on power up after executing an M02 M30 or after an EMERGENCY or RESET One block may contain all the desired G functions and in any order except G20 G21 G22 G23 G24 G25 G26 G27 G28 G29 G30 G31 G32 G50 G51 G53 G59 G72 G74 a
146. d by means of the following keys B Every time this key is pressed the CNC increases the spindle speed by 5 The maximum being 120 of the programmed speed It must be borne in mind that the maximum speed is limited by the value assigned to the range currently selected Every time this key is pressed the CNC decreases the spindle speed by 5 The minimum being 50 of the programmed speed 4 7 SPINDLE STOP To stop the spindle rotation press sTor The CNC stores the S speed which was selected before stopping and the spindle resumes this speed when pressing the or key Chapter 4 Section Page SPINDLE START UP AND STOP 5 48 SPINDLE ORIENTATION If the manufacturer offers this feature on the machine standard on this CNC the operator may orient the spindle to the desired angular position To do this key in the following keystroke sequence S the bottom of the screen will display S POS A Key in the desired orientation angle value For example S20 or 35 006 Press gt Every time the spindle is being oriented after working in open loop in regular rpm mode the CNC will slow down the spindle speed below the value indicated by parameter P706 if it was turning it will home it search for the marker pulse of the spindle encoder and it will finally position orient it to the specified angle S POS This spindle position will be displayed in whole degrees and in large characters as
147. d or left hand threads will be made by previously selecting the turning direction of the spindle The X axis movements are carried out by means of either the mechanical handwheel electronic handwheel or the JOG keys on the operator panel The Z axis movements are carried out by the following keystroke sequences BEGIN Moves only the Z axis to the BEGIN point Moves only the Z axis to the END point This movement is always synchronized with the spindle Therefore this sequence must be followed to perform the threading operation and the sequence to withdraw once the cutter has been withdrawn Considerations Itis a good idea to define the BEGIN point away from the work piece in order for the whole thread to be executed at the same feedrate It is also convenient if the shape of the work piece allows it to define the END point out of the threading area in order to avoid unwanted machining at that point Chapter 5 Section Page AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS THREADING 31 5 6 2 AUTOMATIC THREADING CYCLE mode X A Safety distance teu rA on Z Safety distance on X distance i Thread exit The CNC shows the BEGIN and END values currently selected and they can be changed if so desired If the BEGIN and END coordinates are aligned along the X axis the CNC will perform a cylindrical thread and a taper thread if otherwise maintaining the inclination set by these two points
148. d press CLEAR The CNC will request confirmation of the command When deleting an operation the CNC compresses the part program shifting all the following operations one position forward To insert a new operation follow the same procedure as for editing a part program Once the operation has been defined position the cursor over the operation number to be assigned to it and press ENTER to store it in memory The CNC requests confirmation of the command Press 1 to insert this new one or ENTER to replace the current old one To copy an already existing operation into another position move the cursor over the operation to be copied and press RECALL The CNC recovers all the values stored with that operation and it displays them at the bottom of the screen Then select the operation number where it is to be copied and press ENTER The CNC will request confirmation of the command Chapter 7 Section Page WORKING WITH PART PROGRAMS PART PROGRAM 9 MODIFICIATION 7 7 PART PROGRAM DELETION To delete a part program choose one of the following methods Select the desired part program on the part program directory and press CLEAR or select the desired part program position the cursor over its header PART01435 and press CLEAR In either case the CNC will request confirmation of the command PART 1 TURNING 47632 2 FACING 32540 3 THREADING de 5 9 6 7 9 Page
149. d proceed as indicated in the section on Cycle finishing pass and safety distance of the chapter on Auxiliary functions in this manual When storing a profile rounding as part of part program the CNC stores as it does in the other machining operations the parameters Finishing pass finishing feedrate finishing tool and safety distances along X and Z together with the values defined by the operation Page Chapter 5 Section 28 AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS ROUNDING Basic operation It is possible to perform the rounding operation from beginning to end without interruption or a pass at a time by pressing m Once the proper data has been entered press for the CNC to execute the rounding operation Before starting the part execution the CNC calculates the actual pass used during the rounding operation all the passes will be identical and the corresponding finishing pass The machining steps will be the following 1 The spindle will start at the selected speed and turning direction 2 Ifthe cycle has been programmed to be executed with another tool the CNC will perform a tool change moving the axes to the tool change position if so required by the machine 3 The tool will approach the BEGIN point keeping the selected safety distance from it along the X and Z axes 4 Successive rounding passes will be run all of them parallel to the programmed profile and maintaining the tool angle XT
150. de shows next to the coordinates corresponding to the 12 points that may define the profile the BEGIN and END coordinates selected at the time It is possible to select new coordinates for the BEGIN and END points by pressing the key associated to each one of those points and assigning them the desired value For example BEGIN 1 0 5 ENTER It is also possible to assign to the BEGIN and END points the coordinates of any point of the profile To do this proceed as follows Selectinreverse order the point whose coordinates are to be assigned to the BEGIN or END point To do this use the P key as well as the up and down arrow keys Press BEGIN or END accordingly Press ENTER Page Chapter 6 Section 4 PROFILES SEMIAUTOMATIC MODE 6 2 PROFILE IN AUTOMATIC CYCLE MODE When selecting the AUTOMATIC MODE CYCLE it is possible to define a profile and execute it automatically With this feature it is possible to rough parts in a single operation by defining either the profile or a path close ot it formed by straight sections If machine parameter P617 8 1 up to 9 points may be defined as well as rounding associated with points P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 and P7 P8 Pa X6668 886 XBB88 888 X8888 888 X8888 888 XB888 888 XB888 888 X6688 888 XB888 888 X8888 888 ZBBB8B BB8 Z8888 888 Z8888 888 Z8888 888 ZB888 888 ZBBBB BBB ZBBB8B 888 Z8
151. der to output later the corresponding new analog voltage when the spindle is turned on If the new selected rpm correspond to another range the CNC will either generate or request a range change The programmed spindle speed may be overridden between 50 and 120 with an incremental step of 596 by using the keys on the Operator Panel Page Chapter 4 Section 2 SPINDLE REVOLUTIONS PER MINUTE RPM 43 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED In order to work in this mode it is necessary to have an encoder mounted on the spindle Before entering this mode CSS the right spindle speed range must be selected If not so the CNC will select the first range lowest Also the CSS mode must be selected CSS lamp on If not so press this key to select it Once this work mode CSS has been selected the CRT will display the following type of information F 0100 000 100 CSS 180 100 MAX 1500 T2 Which indicates The selected Constant Surface speed CSS This value is given in m min or feet min depending on the work units currently active To select another value press S and after keying in the desired value press The percentage 46 of spindle speed override being applied The programmed Constant Surface Speed may be overridden between 50 and ore an incremental step of 5 by using the A keys on the opera The maximum spindle speed permitted MAX To select another maximum speed press S le and afte
152. ding radius It is also necessary to select the type of rounding to be performed concave or convex by means of the key and the type of profile corresponding to the corner to be rounded by means of the up and down arrow keys as shown below NM K Z py A I 8050502 Before performing the rounding operation position the tool at the beginning point by means of either the mechanical handwheel electronic handwheel or the JOG keys on the operator panel Chapter 5 Section Page AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS ROUNDING 19 Then use the JOG keys for the Z axis Z and Z according to the direction of the movement The CNC will perform the corresponding 90 rounding See figure 9050503 Page Chapter 5 Section 20 AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS ROUNDING 5 5 2 AUTOMATIC ROUNDING CYCLE mode The automatic rounding may be defined in two ways a By indicating the theoretical corner to be rounded and its radius In the a case it is necessary to define the BEGIN point and in the b case both the BEGIN and END points must be defined The following data must also be defined R Defines the rounding radius A Defines the distance between two consecutive rounding passes If programmed with a 0 value the CNC will take the N value into account N Defines the number of rounding passes in the roughing stage When completed the CNC will run the finishing pass This parameter will b
153. diting the automatic operations to be stored This Way every time a previously stored part is executed the CNC will carry out each one of the automatic operations with the tool and spindle turning direction set in the editing mode 4 This window shows the coordinates of the BEGIN and END points Also when selecting an automatic operation it will show the corresponding parameters and a drawing representing it 5 CNC communications and editing window Page Chapter 1 Section 2 CONCEPTS CRT DESCRIPTION 1 2 KEYBOARD DESCRIPTION It consists of the following keys Numeric keyboard consisting of the following keys 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 e j to enter integer and decimal values with or without sign To assign values to the machine parameters during CNC installation o To select the previous or next option when so required by the displayed menu as well as to carry out the machine reference zero home search 4 To move the zoom window at the compact model To do this at the modular model use the 0 e keys To select the X axis for later data entry or modification regarding this axis Once this value is keyed in press ENTER E To select the Z axis for later data entry or modification regarding this axis Once this value is keyed in press ENTER To select the axis feedrate for later entry or modification of its value Once this value is keyed in press ENTER e 5
154. do this key in the desired number when the CNC requests the number of the program to be transferred and press ENTER P00000 to P99990 Corresponding to part programs P99994 and P99996 Special user program in ISO code P99997 i for internal use and CANNOT be transmitted back and orth P99998 Used to associate texts to PLC messages P99999 Machine parameters and tables Atention N The part programs cannot be edited at the peripheral device or computer The CRT will show the message RECEIVING or SENDING during the program transfer and the message PROGRAM NUM P23256 for example RECEIVED or SENT when the transmission is completed Chapter 3 Section Page AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS PERIPHERALS 13 When the transmission is not correct it will display the message Transmission error and when the data received by the CNC is not recognized different format by the CNC it will issue the message Incorrect data received The CNC memory must be unlocked in order to perform any data transmission if not so the CNC will return to the menu of the peripheral mode When transmitting from a peripheral device other than a FAGOR Floppy Disk Unit the following aspects must be considered The program must begin with a NULL character ASCII 00 followed by 96 program number for example 9623256 and a LINE FEED character LF Blank spaces the carriage return key and the sign are ignored
155. ds any intermediate point may be programmed instead of the center coordinates I K The cartesian coordinate format is N4 G09 X 4 3 Z 4 3 144 3 K 4 3 N4 Block number G09 Code for arc defined by three points X X coordinate of the arc s end point Z Z coordinate of the arc s end point I X coordinate of an intermediate point of the arc K Z coordinate of an intermediate point of the arc The polar coordinate format is N4 G09 R 4 3 A 4 3 144 3 K 4 3 N4 Block number G09 Code for arc defined by three points R Radius of the arc s end point with respect to the polar origin A Angle of the arc s end point with respect to the polar origin I X coordinate of an intermediate point of the arc K Z coordinate of an intermediate point of the arc As can be observed here the intermediate point must always be expressed in cartesian coordinates X Example 604 X axis programmed in diameter Starting point PO X60 Z70 and end point of the arc X120 Z20 the block will look like this T Py N4 G09 X120 Z20 160 K50 or G03 is not required when programming G09 MPT10 G09 is not modal The direction of the arc G02 G09 only replaces G02 and G03 in the 20 50 block containing it Atention A complete circle cannot be drawn by using G09 since all three points must be different The CNC will issue error 40 when attempting to do so Page Chapter 5 Section 8 P
156. e Parameter setting Machine parameters P622 7 and P622 8 indicate whether this feature is available or not P622 7 0 Not available for the Z axis P622 7 1 Available for the Z axis P622 8 0 Not available for the X axis P622 8 1 Available for the X axis In order to use Variable Backlash Compensation regular leadscrew compensation must also be activated P605 2 0 X axis Leadscrew error compensation 0 No 1 Yes P605 1 0 Z axis Leadscrew error compensation 02 No 1 Yes Operation The first 15 points of the table are for the positive direction and the other 15 for the negative direction When compensating for leadscrew error the amount of backlash is the difference between both graphs Backlash Positive direction a pps f c Negative direction Position When leadscrew error compensation is not to be used all the values of one of the tables must be set to 0 thus the other graph will correspond to the leadscrew backlash Backlash Positive direction ui Position Negative direction Notes Both graphs must meet all the requirements of the leadscrew error compensation tables One of these requirements states that the Machine Reference Zero home must be assigned an error of 0 Iftheleadscrew has some backlash atthis Machine Reference Zero point that amount of backlash must be allocated to machine parameter P109 or P309 Backlash for the X ax
157. e executing it When simulating a part the CNC always begins with PART 01346 operation 1 and ends when it detects an empty position 1 TURNING even if the part has other operations later on 2 FACING To do this select the corresponding part PART 01346 3 press SIMUL at the compact model or the key sequence THREADING s at the modular model 4 5 9 6 2 The lower left hand side of the screen shows the axes 7 9 of the plane The screen shows a graphic page To define the display area proceed as follows Press at the compact model and at the modular model Indicate the XZ coordinates of the position to be displayed at the center of the screen Set the width of the display area After keying in each value press ENTER aera Width To check the part press This will start the corresponding graphic simulation Press CLEAR to clear the screen and END to quit the simulation mode Page Chapter 7 Section 4 WORKING WITH PART PROGRAM PART PROGRAM RENE OG SIMULATION 7 41 ZOOM FUNCTION With this function it is possible to enlarge or reduce the whole graphic representation or part of it To do this the simulation of the program must be either interrupted or finished Press Z The screen will show a rectangle over the original drawing This rectangle represents the new display area to be enlarged or reduced To change the dimensions of the rectangle us
158. e Speed CSS Spindle Orientation Tools Tool Compensation Live Tool Electronic Hand wheels RS 232C Communications Integrated PLC PLCI ISO coded program editing P99996 Execution of ISO coded program P99996 Graphics NEW FEATURES AND MODIFICATIONS Date April 1993 Software Version 2 1 and newer FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND SECTION Rapid jog depending on position of Feedrate Override Switch Operating Manual Section 2 3 1 Tool for the finishing pass Installation Manual Section 3 5 Operating Manual Section 3 5 Handwheel movement limited to maximum Operating Manual Section 2 3 3 allowed F Control of software travel limits when using a handwheel Display format for S Installation Manual Section 6 Possibility to activate deactivate outputs Ol O2 O3 after interrupting the program Automatic operation Profile Rounding Operating Manual Section 5 5 3 Profiles Operating Manual Chapter 6 Date October 1993 Software Version 3 1 and newer FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND SECTION Spindle acc dec Operating Manual Chapter 6 RPM Limitation when operating in CSS Operating Manual Section 4 3 1 Spindle orientation Installation Manual Section 6 4 1 Operating Manual Section 4 8 Live tool Installation Manual Section 5 9 Operating Manual Section 2 3 Automatic operation Simple Drilling Operating Manual Section 5 8 Automatic operation Multiple Dr
159. e amount of time To resume program execution follow these steps Ist Select the DRO mode the one appearing on CNC power up after the General Test Passed In this mode no cycle appears selected 2nd Press RECALL to open the part programs window 3rd Select the part that was running Use the up and down arrow keys to position over the desired part program and press RECALL uj 4th Use the up and down arrow keys to select the operation being interrupted and press The CNC will executed the selected operation and it will resume the part program running it to the end Version 6 1 January 1997 1 NEW LANGUAGES Taiwanese and Portuguese Machine parameter P99 P99 5 Portuguese P99 26 Taiwanese 2 MODIFICATIONS ON THE OPERATION WITH A MASTER HANDWHEEL The operation with the master handwheel is now as follows a When the machine is stopped Only the first handwheel is enabled the second one master does not work Therefore only the X axis can be jogged with a handwheel b When the machine is running CNC in Execution Only the Master handwheel is enabled the first handwheel does not work The axes start moving when turning the Master Handwheel The feedrate of the axes depend on the turning speed of the Master Handwheel When the handwheel stops the machine also stops When the Master Handwheel is turned in the opposite direction the CNC also reverses the moving direction Retrace Function of a single blo
160. e devices may be activated or deactivated at any time unless indicated otherwise by the machine manufacturer To do this the following keys are available Each one of these keys have a lamp to indicate that the device is on lamp on or the device is off lamp off Every time one of these keys is pressed the status of the corresponding device will toggle activated deactivated as well as the corresponding key lamp Page Chapter 2 Section 10 BASIC OPERATIONS EXTERNAL DEVICES 3 AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS Once the standard work mode has been selected press AUX to access this option The CNC will then show a menu of options To select the desired option press the key for its corresponding number However itis possible to access the Cycle Finishing Pass and safety distance option directly by pressing AUX while in the Automatic Operations mode When selecting the AUXILIARY MODES option the CNC requests the access code password to be able to use the various tables and modes for the OEM Press END to quit any of these options and return to the standard display mode 3 1 MILLIMETERS INCHES When selecting this option the CNC changes the display units from mm to inches and vice versa showing the new X and Z coordinates of the axes in the new selected units The axis feedrate F will also be shown in the new selected units The units for the axis feedrate will also be changed and the
161. e program Press TOOL At this time the CNC executes the miscellaneous function MOS to stop the spindle and it displays the following message on the screen JOG KEYS AVAILABLE OUT Move the tool to the desired position by using the JOG keys Once the tool is out of the way the spindle may be started and stopped again by its corresponding keys at the Operator Panel Once the tool inspection or replacement is completed press END The CNC will execute an M03 or M04 function to start the spindle in the direction it was turning when the program was interrupted the screen will display the following message RETURN AXES OUT OF POSITION Axes out of position means that they are not at the position where the program was interrupted Jog the axes to the program interruption position by means the corresponding jog keys The CNC will not allow to move them passed overtravel this position When the axes are in position the screen will display RETURN AXES OUT OF POSITION NONE Press to resume the execution of program P99996 Chapter 3 Section Page AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS TOOL INSPECTION 7 3 4 4 TOOL OFFSET MODIFICATION With this option itis possible to modify the tool wear compensations LK to correct the tool dimensions This option can only be accessed during the execution of a part or the user program P99996 both while in execution and while interrupted This option is typically used after T
162. e speed range gear machine parameter P601 1 must set to 0 When the new selected spindle speed S involves a gear change the CNC displays a message indicating which range has to be selected The operator must proceed as follows Ist Manually change gears 2nd Press ENTER The CNC restores spindle rotation and resumes program execution 5 VARIABLE BACKLASH COMPENSATION Until now the 800T CNC allowed for a single leadscrew backlash compensation From now on it is also possible to compensate for motion reversal backlash depending on the particular backlash areas of the axes Requirements The leadscrew error compensation tables are now used for leadscrew error compensation and for this Variable Backlash Compensation atthe same time Parameter setting Machine parameters P622 7 and P622 8 indicate whether this feature is available or not P6227 0 Not available for the Z axis P622 7 1 Available for the Z axis P622 8 0 Not available for the X axis P622 8 1 Available for the X axis In order to use Variable Backlash Compensation regular leadscrew compensation must also be activated P605 2 20 X axis Leadscrew error compensation 02 No 1 Yes P605 1 20 Z axis Leadscrew error compensation 02 No 1 Yes Operation The first 15 points of the table are for the positive direction and the other 15 for the negative direction When compensating for leadscrew error the amount of
163. e taken into account when A 0 If both A and N are programmed with a 0 value the CNC will issue the corresponding error message Chapter 5 Section Page AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS ROUNDING 21 The CNC in order to obtain a good part finish applies tool compensation on the last machining pass and to do so it needs to know the type of profile to be machined The bottom of the screen shows the type of profile currently selected and another may be chosen by means of the up and down arrow keys 8050502 It is also necessary to select by means of the o key the type of rounding to carry out concave or convex The various possible profiles are Lib rrrrpp 3713198 8 141448 Bp5b506 Page Chapter 5 Section 22 AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS ROUNDING If a finishing pass has been set A other than 0 the CNC behaves as follows Example 1 To remove 20 mm with a pass of A 2 With A 50 The CNC runs ten 1 9mm passes plus a 1mm finishing pass with the finishing tool T at the selected F With A 100 The CNC runs ten 2mm passes the last of which is carried out with the finishing tool T at the selected F If F 100 the finishing pass is run at the same feedrate as the roughing passes Example 2 To remove 1mm setting N 1 With A 40 The CNC runs one 0 6mm pass plus one 0 4mm finishing pass with the finishing tool T at the selected F Wit
164. e these keys Reduces the size of the rectangle zoom in Increases the size of the rectangle zoom out Use the following keys to move the zoom window around At the compact modell u At the modular model 0 e lt To set the area selected with the zoom window as he new display area press ENTER To see he selected area enlarged or reduced while keeping the previous display area values press at the compact model and at the modular model The area contained in the zoom window will now fill the whole screen To return to the previous display area prior to the zoom press END To use the zoom again just press Z and proceed as before To quit the ZOOM function and return to the graphic representation press END Chapter 7 Section Page WORKING WITH PART PROGRAMS PART PROGRAM 5 9 SIMULATION 7 5 PART PROGRAM EXECUTION When executing a part program the CNC always starts from operation 1 and ends when a free position is found even when the program has other operations To execute a part program select it by positioning the cursor over its corresponding header PART 01346 and PART 01346 meee 1 TURNING Once the part program is selected it is executed 2 FACING operation after operation starting from the first one 3 Every time the CNC selects an operation it will show THREADING it highlighted and it will make a copy into the editing 4 area bottom of the scree
165. ed f Indicates the final diameter to be obtained in the turning operation A Indicates the turning pass and it is given by a positive radius value If 0 is programmed the CNC will use the N value N Defines the number of roughing passes When completed the CNC will run the finishing pass This parameter will be taken into account when A 0 If both the A and N are programmed with a 0 value the CNC will issue the corresponding error message If a finishing pass has been set A other than 0 the CNC behaves as follows Example 1 To remove 20 mm with a pass of A 2 With A 50 The CNC runs ten 1 9mm passes plus a 1mm finishing pass with the finishing tool T at the selected F With A 100 The CNC runs ten 2mm passes the last of which is carried out with the finishing tool T at the selected F If F 100 the finishing pass is run at the same feedrate as the roughing passes Example 2 To remove 1mm setting N 1 With A 40 The CNC runs one 0 6mm pass plus one 0 4mm finishing pass with the finishing tool T at the selected F With A 100 and F 50 With A 100 and F 100 The CNC runs one 1mm pass with the finishing tool T at 50 of the programmed F The CNC runs one 1mm pass with the finishing tool T at the programmed F Chapter 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS Section TURNING Page 9 Basic operation The turning operation may be executed from beginning to end without inter
166. eed MAX in that mode Once the value has been keyed in press ENTER so it is assumed by the CNC S When the machine has a live tool this sequence permits selecting its turning speed TRPM e and s to quit the part program directory and switch to editing the selected automatic operation Page Chapter 1 Section 6 CONCEPTS KEYBOARD DESCRIPTION 1 2 3 OPERATOR PANEL Depending on their function this panel is divided into the following areas 2 Keyboard to jog the axes SPINDLE en STOP Selector switch consisting of the following elements To select the multiplying factor applied by the CNC to the pulses from the electronic handwheel 1 10 100 JOG To select the distance the axis will move 1 10 100 1000 microns or ten thousandths of an inch when pressing the corresponding key FEED To change the programmed feedrate between 0 and 120 Keyboard to control the spindle It can be started in the desired direction stopped or change its turning speed between 50 and 120 of the programmed speed with an incremental step of 5 Keyboard for START and STOP of the programmed movements automatic operations and part programs Location for the Emergency Stop button E stop Chapter 1 CONCEPTS Section KEYBOARD DESCRIPTION Page 1 3 DISPLAY UNITS mm inches The main window of the 800T CNC shows at all times the X and Z coordinates of the
167. eels and none mechanical Parameter setting Machine parameter P622 6 indicates whether this feature is being used or not P622 6 P622 6 0 Jog with Master handwheel is not available 1 Jog with Master handwheel is available As stated above the control of the Jog with Master Handwheel is carried out with the Second Handwheel Therefore the machine must have two electronic handwheels and none mechanical This means that P621 7 1 The machine does not use mechanical handwheels P622 3 0 It uses two electronic handwheels P609 1 0 The first handwheel is not a FAGOR 100P model The Master handwheel is connected via connector A4 It admits both sine wave and square wave differential signals This implies setting the following machine parameters as follows P621 6 Counting direction of the Master Handwheel P621 3 Feedback units of the Master Handwheel P621 1 2 Feedback resolution of the Master Handwheel P621 5 Feedback multiplying factor for the Master Handwheel Selection a CNC Models S00TI and SOOTGI From the PLCI Once all machine parameters have been set PLCI output O39 must be used to enable or disable the Jog with Master Handwheel feature Parameter P622 6 PLCI output O39 Jog with Master Hand wheel P622 6 2 0 Feature not available P622 6 21 Feature disabled P622 6 1 Feature enabled b CNC Models 800T and 800TG Using pin 11 of connector I O 1
168. en 0 and FFFFFFFF and may not be the first operand F30 Logic AND function Example N4 P1 P2 F30 P3 Value of P2 Value of P3 Value of P1 A5C631F C883D C001D F31 Logic OR function Example N4 P112 P25 F31 H35AF9DO1 Value of P25 Value of H Value of P11 48BE6 35AF9DOI 35AF9FE7 F32 Logic XOR function Example N4 P19 P72 F32 H91C6EF Value of P72 Value of H Value of P19 AB456 91C6EF 9B72B9 F33 Logic NOT function Example N4 P154 F33 P88 P154 takes the ones complement of inverts its bits P88 Value of P88 Value of P154 4A52D63F B5AD29CO 10 5 OPERATOR F36 This function does not affect the jump flags F36 N4Pl F36 P1 takes the current tool number Chapter 10 Section Page OPERATORS PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING F30 through F33 amp F36 7 10 6 CONDITIONAL JUMP FUNCTIONS G26 G27 G28 G29 They are similar to function G25 unconditional jump described in the chapter on Additional Preparatory Functions in this manual Functions G26 G27 G28 and G29 before jumping to the indicated program block verify that the required condition has been met G26 Jump if zero It requires the Zero condition to be met G27 Jump if not zero It requires the Zero condition NOT to be met G28 Jump if less than zero It requires the Less than condition to be met G29 Jump if equal greater than 0 It requires the Less than condition NOT to be met The Zero condition also referred to as Equal to is activated
169. ent ON G47 OPF O48 iiie eser teen ten eee reb er epa roe edi creci 9 Me ri deus EMPERO Chapter 7 TOOL COMPENSATION T4 Select and initiate tool radius compensation G41 G42 sese 5 peo Cipergion with too radius compensation an a 7 T3 Temporary tool radius cancellation with GOO siii g 7 4 Cancellation of tool radius compensation OAD i e creen ttn entre tete euh ea 10 Section HEN Chapter 8 MACHINING CANNED CYCLES 8 1 Turning camed cycle G07 NOI aerae HUE tea tp ke ata Eea EE Nee FARM Mes MEA ae 2 8 2 Facu came rel luf N gg emm 4 5 3 Taper tuning canned cycle G07 N2 iiu dsesicteseiestpasta pe Hat apes pi 6 8 4 Tihreadcuttine canned Cycle GIO NAE d HEISE Stabat ao ch Pa Icd idee Mae uiuo 8 8 5 Rounding canned cycle 667 INS sandalia 10 8 6 Grooving canned cycle G07 nin 12 8 7 Multiple drilling canned cycle GGT NBI anie ee eter bett iet tordos arde te abb ARE EK ici 14 8 8 Simple drilling canned cycle tapping canned cycle G67 N7 sss 16 8 9 Slot miling canned cycle 67 NE ii ii as ade 18 8 10 Pattern repegiug canned eyele O ens 20 8 11 Stock removal canned cycle alone X GOE surcar lia 24 8 12 Stock removal canned Cycle along atc GO cis 28 8 13 Turning canned cycle with straight sections G81 i e aeterne intente poses 32 8 14 Facing canned cycle with straight sections G82 iniciacion 34 8 15 Turning canned cycle with curved sections G84 Lise etse arterias tests 36 8 16 Facing ca
170. er 8 Section Page MACHINING CANNED CYCLES STOCK CQ ALONGX 25 When programming this canned cycle the following should be borne in mind 1 The distance between the starting point 0 and final point B along X must be equal to or greater than P7 Toavoiderror31 whenoperating with tool compensation the value of this distance from 0 to B should be equal to P7 NP5 N being an integer number any multiple of P5 2 The distance from 0 to A along the Z axis should be higher than P8 3 Thedefinition of the pattern must not include point A because itis identified by PO and P1 4 The machining conditions feedrate spindle rotation etc must be programmed before calling the cycle The parameters can be programmed in the calling block or in previous blocks This canned cycle does not alter the call parameters which may be used in later cycles However it does modify the values of parameters P70 through P99 The movements ofthe elementary work cycle see drawing are carried out as follows At the programmed feedrate from point 1 to point 2 and from 2 to 3 butin rapid from point 0 to point 1 and from 3 to 0 The exit conditions are G00 and G90 5 The pattern can be made up of straight lines and arcs All the blocks of pattern definition will be programmed with cartesian coordinates being mandatory to program the two axes in absolute otherwise the CRT will display error 21 If arcs are included in the definit
171. er on the operator it is possible to set the initial and final points BEGIN and END the slope of a chamfer the rounding radius etc Before starting to execute an automatic operation it is necessary to define the machining conditions spindle speed axes feedrate tool etc However it is possible to select other values while executing automatic operations To do this their execution must be interrupted first Chapter 5 Section Page AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS INTRODUCTION 1 5 1 2 AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS IN AUTOMATIC MODE CYCLE When selecting the automatic mode CYCLE it is possible to define an operation and execute it automatically In each operation it is necessary to define the data associated with that operation besides the BEGIN and END points The keys available for selecting these data are ral e eee To define a data which has no selection key H TW press another data s key for example BEGIN and use the up and down arrow keys to select the desired data Each machining operation also has the following parameters associated with it finishing pass finishing feedrate finishing tool and safety distances along X and Z To define them press AUX and operate as described in the section on Cycle finishing pass and safety distance of the chapter on Auxiliary functions of this manual It must be borne in mind that in order to obtain a proper part finish the CNC appl
172. er programmed incorrectly 050 Constant Surface Speed has been selected while the machine uses the BCD coded spindle speed output 054 There is no tape in the cassette reader or the reader head cover is open or there is no disk in the FAGOR Floppy Disk Unit 055 Parity error when reading or writing a cassette or a disk 057 Write protected tape or disk 058 Sluggish tape or disk movement 059 CNC communication error with the cassette reader or FAGOR Floppy Disk Unit 060 Internal CNC hardware error Consult with the Technical Service Department 061 Battery error The memory contents will be kept for 10 more days with the CNC off from the moment this error occurs The whole battery module located on the back must be replaced Consult with the Technical Service Department Atention Due to danger of explosion or combustion do not try to recharge the battery do not expose it to temperatures higher than 100 C 232 F and do not short the battery leads 064 External emergency input pin 14 of connector I O1 is activated 066 068 070 072 074 075 076 077 078 079 087 088 089 090 092 093 094 095 096 098 099 100 101 105 106 108 This error comes up if while probing G75 the programmed position is reached without receiving the probe signal X axis travel limit overrun Itis generated either because
173. ercentage of the programmed roughing pass used as finishing pass It is given by an integer If a value of 0 or 100 is assigned all the machining passes roughing and finishing will be identical Finishing feedrate of the roughing feedrate It indicates the percentage 96 of the programmed roughing feedrate used as finishing feedrate It is given by an integer If a value of 0 is assigned the feedrate of the finishing pass will be the same as the one used for the roughing passes Tool to be used for the finishing pass It is possible to perform the roughing operation with one tool the one selected in the operation itself and use the one indicated by this parameter to do the finishing operation integer between 0 and 32 If a value of 0 is assigned the finishing operation will be carried out with the same tool used for the roughing operations The finishing tool is selected once the roughing operation is completed If the machine has an automatic tool changer the tool will be selected automatically but when the tool change is to be carried out by the operator the CNC will indicate the tool to be selected When the tool change is fal manually the CNC will request this change being necessary to press once the tool change is completed in order to resume part program METER Chapter 3 Section Page AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS CYCLE FINISHING PASS 9 Safety distance along the X axis for automatic operations
174. ertheless it is recommended to keep it away from sources of electromagnetic disturbance such as Powerful loads connected to the same AC power line as this equipment Nearby portable transmitters Radio telephones Ham radio transmitters Nearby radio TC transmitters Nearby arc welding machines Nearby High Voltage power lines Etc Ambient conditions The working temperature must be between 5 C and 45 C 41 F and 113 F The storage temperature must be between 25 C and 70 C 13 F and 158 F Introduction 3 Protections of the unit itsel Central Unit It carries two fast fuses of 3 15 Amp 250V to protect the mains AC input All the digital inputs and outputs are protected by an external fast fuse F of 3 15 Amp 250V againsta voltage overload greater than 33Vdc and against reverse connection of the power supply Monitor The type of protection fuse depends on the type of monitor See the identification label of the unit itself Precautions during repair Do not manipulate the inside of the unit Only personnel authorized by Fagor Automation may manipulate the inside of this unit Do not manipulate the connectors with the unit connected to AC power Before manipulating the connectors inputs outputs feedback etc make sure that the unit is not connected to AC power Safety symbols Symbols which may appear on the manual WARNING symbol Ithasanassociated text indicating those
175. es the center of the arc as the new polar origin Page Chapter 2 Section 4 COORDINATE PROGRAMMING POLAR COORDINATES MPT62 Programming examples in millimeters and X axis in diameter Example 1 x 40 Diode e E f QU E R 30 P A 270 4 Po o gt In absolute coordinates G90 a9 Z N100 G93 I80 K50 Polar origin preset N110 G01 G90 R30 A270 PO N120 R28 284 A225 oon P1 N130 R40 A180 P2 In incremental coordinates G91 N100 G93 I80 K50 Polar origin preset N110 G01 G90 R30 A270 PO N120 G91 R 1 716 A 45 Pl N130 R11 716 A 45 P2 Example 2 assuming PO X40 Z50 as the starting point i In absolute coordinates G90 X SL pars X or N100 G93 1100 K40 5 N110 G90 G02 A198 435 288 435 In incremental coordinates G91 N100 G90 G02 A198 435 I30 K 10 N100 G91 G02 A 90 I30 K 10 20 Fo or N100 G93 1100 K40 N110 G91 G02 A 90 8 g NT Chapter 2 Section Page COORDINATE PROGRAMMING POLAR COORDINATES 5 2 3 5 PROGRAMMING BY TWO ANGLES AI A2 An intermediate point of a path may also be defined by Al A2 X Z Where Al is the exit angle from the starting point of the path PO A2 is the exit angle from the intermediate point P1 X Z are the coordinates of the end point P2 The CNC automatically calcu
176. est confirmation of the command being necessary to press this key again to acknowledge it To cancel the reset command press CLEAR instead If this key is pressed while an automatic operation turning facing etc is selected the CNC will quit that mode and will return to the DRO display mode Y To access the menu for the auxiliary functions of the CNC E To turn the coolant on or off When the coolant is on the lamp of the key will also be on o o2 With these keys it is possible to activate or deactivate outputs O1 O2 and O3 Their lamps will turn on when the corresponding outputs are on To select the type of spindle control to be used rpm or Constant Surface speed CSS The CNC will highlight the selected option Besides the lamp of this key will stay on when the Constant Surface Speed mode is selected ERA This key is used to access the incremental mode INC When this mode is selected the lamp of this key will stay on To return to the standard mode press this key again and its lamp will turn off an It selects the mode in which the automatic operation will be executed Continuous mode The key lamp stays off and the selected operation will be carried out from beginning to end without interruptions Single mode the key lamp stays on and the selected operation is executed a single pass at a time The key must be pressed to run each pass SIMUL It selects the program simulation mode at the comp
177. ftware supplied upon request in floppy disks it is possible to perform the following operations from the computer Obtain the CNC s part program directory Transfer part programs and tables from and to the CNC Delete part programs at the CNC Certain remote control of the machine Note At the CNC any operating mode may be selected Page Chapter 7 Section 12 WORKING WITH PART PROGRAMS PERIPHERALS 7 9 LOCK UNLOCK With this option it is possible to lock unlock the part program memory in order to protect them against accidental manipulation To select this option press AUX and after selecting Auxiliary Modes press the key corresponding to LOCK UNLOCK The codes used to do this are N0000 ENTER Unlocks part program memory N1111 ENTER Locks part program memory PF000 ENTER Frases the contents of all arithmetic parameters for automatic operations setting them to 0 Chapter 7 WORKING WITH PART PROGRAMS Section LOCK UNLOCK Page 13 e PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES Page EXAMPLE 1 3 Outside machining operation by operation EXAMPLE 2 11 Machining of the part of Example 1 but using the cycle of pattern repeat in straight sections This way the part is done in fewer operations EXAMPLE 3 17 Inside and outside machining EXAMPLE 4 23 Outside machining with Taper threading and Profile with a valley Chapter 8 Section Page PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES
178. g in N RECALL and ences To interrupt the program press Once interrupted the following keys are enabled a 6 To resume execution press Chapter 3 Section Page AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS o e e 17 3 10 1 1 TOOL INSPECTION With this option it is possible to interrupt the execution of program P99996 and inspect the tool to check its status and change it if necessary To do this follow these steps a Press to interrupt the program b Press TOOL At this time the CNC executes the miscellaneous function MOS to stop the spindle and it displays the following message on the screen JOG KEYS AVAILABLE OUT c Move the tool to the desired position by using the JOG keys Once the tool is out of the way the spindle may be started and stopped again by its corresponding keys at the Operator Panel d Once the tool inspection or replacement is completed press END The CNC will execute an M03 or M04 function to start the spindle in the direction it was turning when the program was interrupted The screen will display the following message RETURN AXES OUT OF POSITION Axes out of position means that they are not at the position where the program was interrupted e Jog the axes to the program interruption position by means the corresponding jog keys The CNC will not allow to move them passed overtravel this position When the axes are in position the screen will display RETURN AXES OUT OF
179. g to point A If the value is positive this movement will be done in G05 rounded corner The 0 value is considered positive If the value is negative this movement will be done in G07 square corner Finishing pass in radius If it is 0 the previous pass is repeated If the value is positive the finishing pass will be carried out maintaining a P12 2 angle with the X axis If the value is negative the finishing pass will be done with radial entry Thread pitch along the Z axis Thread exit It defines the distance from the end of the thread to the point where the exit starts If it is negative error code 3 will be displayed If other than zero the CB section is a tapered thread whose pitch along Z axis is P10 If it is zero the CB section is executed in GOO Angle of the tool s nose It makes the starting points of the successive passes to be at a P12 2 angle with X axis When programming this canned cycle the following must be borne in mind 1 The machining conditions feedrate spindle rotation etc must be programmed before calling the cycle 2 The parameters can be programmed in the calling block or in previous blocks 3 This canned cycle does not alter the call parameters which may be used in later cycles However it does modify the values of parameters P70 through P99 4 The exit conditions are G00 G07 G40 G90 and G97 5 The cycle starts with a GOO approach to point A and ends
180. ge press ENTER 3 The CNC will then consider the range change completed and it will output the analog voltage corresponding to the new spindle speed selected If the new selected spindle speed S requires a range change and it is to be ignored press CLEAR in step 2 instead of ENTER The CNC will cancel the range change operation and it will recover the spindle speed set before 4 4 AUTOMATIC SPINDLE RANGE CHANGE When having an automatic range changer the CNC will manage the electrical cabinet to perform that change thus not requiring operator intervention Page Chapter 4 Section 4 SPINDLE RANGE CHANGE 45 CLOCKWISE SPINDLE ROTATION To turn the spindle clockwise once the spindle speed has been selected press When the spindle is turning a new speed may be selected or change the current speed by means of the following keys 5 Every time this key is pressed the CNC increases the spindle speed by 5 The maximum being 120 of the programmed speed It must be borne in mind that the maximum speed is limited by the value assigned to the range currently selected Every time this key is pressed the CNC decreases the spindle speed by 5 The minimum being 50 of the programmed speed 4 6 COUNTER CLOCKWISE SPINDLE ROTATION To turn the spindle counter clockwise once the spindle speed has been selected press When the spindle is turning a new speed may be selected or change the current spee
181. gned to a function which does not accept the sign or an incorrect value has been given to a canned cycle parameter A canned cycle has been defined while function G02 G03 or G33 was active Parametric block programmed wrong There are more than 10 parameters affected in a block Division by zero Square root of a negative number Parameter value too large The range or the Constant Surface Speed has not been programmed More than 7 M functions in a block This error occurs in the following cases Function G50 is programmed wrong Tool dimension values too large gt Zero offset values G53 G59 too large Canned cycle profile defined incorrectly A block has been programmed which is incorrect either by itself or in relation with the program history up to that instant Functions G20 G21 G22 G23 G24 G25 G26 G27 G28 G29 G30 G31 G32 G50 G53 G54 G55 G56 G57 G58 G59 G72 G73 G74 G92 and G93 must be programmed alone in a block The called subroutine or block does not exist or the block searched by means of special function F17 does not exist Negative or too large thread pitch value Error in blocks where the points are defined by means of angle angle or angle coordinate This error is issued in the following cases gt After defining G20 G21 G22 or G23 the number of the subroutine it refers to is missing gt The N character has not been programmed after function G25 G26 G27 G28 or G29 g
182. gram always has the number 99996 and can be stored either at the CNC or at a PC Program 99996 is a special user program in ISO code and can be Generated from an operation or a part program Edited at the CNC itself via menu option Auxiliary Modes Edit program 99996 Loaded into the CNC after being generated at a PC Generating the ISO program 99996 at the CNC This CNC has 7 K of memory space to store program 99996 If the generated program is larger than that the CNC will issue the relevant error message To generate program 99996 proceed as follows fitis an operation select or define the desired operation fitisapart program select the desired one in the part program directory and place the cursor on its header PART 01435 A listing of the operations it consists of must appear Press the keystroke sequence AUX 7 The CNC will show the graphic simulation screen 1 Press The CNC starts simulating the part and generating its ISO coded program 99996 When done with the simulation program 99996 stored in CNC memory will contain all simulated blocks in ISO code Generating the ISO program 99996 at a PC Usually the 99996 program generated from a part program exceeds the available memory space of the CNC By using DNC30 this program may be generated at a PC To do this proceed as follows Activate DNC communications and execute the DNC30 program at the PC Select at the
183. h A 100 and F 50 The CNC runs one 1mm pass with the finishing tool T at 50 of the programmed F With A 100 and F 100 The CNC runs one Imm pass with the finishing tool T at the programmed F Basic operation The rounding operation may be executed from bes einning to end without interruptions or a pass at a time by pressing Once the proper data has been entered press so the CNC executes the rounding operation g Before starting to execute the part the CNC will calculate the actual pass to be used all the passes will be identical and the corresponding finishing pass The machining steps will be the following 1 The spindle will start at the selected speed and turning direction 2 Ifthe cycle has been programmed to be executed with another tool the CNC will perform a tool change moving the axes to the tool change position if so required by the machine 3 The tool will approach the theoretical corner keeping the selected safety distance from it along the X and Z axes 4 Every rounding pass is carried out as indicated by the illustration starting at point 1 going through points 2 3 4 and 5 and ending at point 1 Chapter 5 Section Page AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS ROUNDING 23 8050508 5 Once the roughing operation has concluded the CNC runs the finishing pass as indicated below and the rounding operation will end at the cycle calling point X 8050509 The feedrate for
184. h the CNC will display the axis position with respe tto the scale s Zero point X or Z up arrow keys and After moving the axis to Machine Reference Zero point home or up to a known position with respect to home Jot down the position reading of the CNC for that known position The value to allocate to the machine parameter setting the scale s offset must be calculated with the following formula Value CNC reading at that point Home coordinate of that point Example for the X axis If the known position is physically located at 230 mm from Machine Reference Zero home and the CNC shows that its position is 423 5 mm the scale offset will be Machine parameter P908 423 5 230 193 5 mm After setting the machine parameter with this value press the RESET key so that value is assumed by the CNC Anew home search must be carried out for the proper values to be assumed for that axis THREADING WITH CONSTANT PENETRATION PASSES From this version on the penetration of each pass will depend on the sign assigned to parameter D When D positive the penetration of each pass depends on the corresponding pass D n With D negative the penetration passes remain constant with the absolute value of parameter D GENERATING AN ISO CODED PROGRAM With this CNC the ISO code low level for an operation or a part program may be generated To use this feature machine parameter P623 2 must be set to 1 This ISO pro
185. hapter 5 Section 12 AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS FACING 5 3 2 AUTOMATIC FACING CYCLE mode 8050302 The CNC displays the selected values and allows to select new ones if so desired The following data can also be defined o Indicates the final diameter to be obtained in the facing operation A Indicates the facing pass and it is given by a positive radius value If 0 is programmed the CNC will use the N value N Defines the number of roughing passes When completed the CNC will run the finishing pass This parameter will be taken into account when A 0 If both the A and N are programmed with a 0 value the CNC will issue the corresponding error message If a finishing pass has been set A other than 0 the CNC behaves as follows Example 1 To remove 20 mm with a pass of A 2 With A 50 The CNC runs ten 1 9mm passes plus a 1mm finishing pass with the finishing tool T at the selected F With A 100 The CNC runs ten 2mm passes the last of which is carried out with the finishing tool T at the selected F If F 100 the finishing pass is run at the same feedrate as the roughing passes Example 2 To remove 1mm setting N 1 With A 40 The CNC runs one 0 6mm pass plus one 0 4mm finishing pass with the finishing tool T at the selected F With A 100 and F 50 With A 100 and F 100 The CNC runs one 1mm pass with the finishing tool T at 50 of the programmed F The CNC runs one 1m
186. hapter 5 Section Page AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS SLOT MILLING 45 Basic operation le 2 3 4 9 10 Does a home search on the spindle if it was in the rpm mode before Makes a tool change if necessary Starts the love tool at the indicated rpm TRPM Orients the spindle to the indicated angular position a Positions the axes in rapid to the approach point A according to the safety distances If the approach point is not lined up with the BEGIN point the tool will move to point B It mills the slot in the following steps 7 The tool penetrates to the BEGIN point at the programmed feedrate 7 2 It mills the slot by moving either the X axis or the Z axis accordingly up to the END point at the programmed feedrate 7 3 Returns in rapid to point C 7 4 Returns in r pido to point B Depending on the value of N Number of slots 8 1 Orients the spindle to the current angular position A 8 2 Repeats the movements of paragraph 7 Returns in rapid to where was pressed The CNC stops the live tool Atention Depending on the orientation defined with the BEGIN and END coordinates the slots will be milled along the Z axis on the cylindric surface of the part or along the X axis on the face of the part In order for this cycle to run either the X coordinates of both BEGIN and END points or their Z coordinates must be the same Otherwise the CNC will issue an error
187. hen assume these new values but it will not modify the actual settings of machine parameters P902 P903 P904 and P905 On the other hand it must be kept in mind that on power up the CNC will reset these zone boundaries to the values set by machine parameters As described earlier this predefined zone may be enabled either as a work zone no exit or as an exclusion zone no entry from the PLCI by means of outputs O46 and O47 When set as a work zone the CNC acts as follows The axes cannot be jogged out of this zone by using the jog keys or the handwheels If attempted to do so during execution the CNC will issue error 67 X Z Limit Error When set as an exclusion zone the CNC acts as follows The axes cannot be jogged into this zone by using the jog keys or the handwheels If attempted to do so during execution the CNC will issue error 67 X Z Limit Error EMT 4 MANUAL SPINDLE GEAR CHANGERS Operation on previous versions To manually change the spindle speed range gear machine parameter P601 1 had to be set to 0 When the new selected spindle speed S involved a gear change the CNC displayed a message indicating which range had to be selected The operator had to proceed as follows Ist Stop the spindle 2nd Manually change gears 3rd Restore spindle rotation 4th Press ENTER The CNC resumed program execution Operation on current and future versions To manually change the spindl
188. her axis will start moving If while an axis is being jogged the fuy key is pressed the CNC will behave as follows If machine parameter P617 6 0 it will move at of the JOG feedrate indicated on the table below This override will be maintained as long as this key is maintained pressed and it will recover the previous feedrate percentage 0 thru 120 when releasing this key If machine parameter P617 6 1 it will move at 100 of the value set for rapid traverse P111 P311 Atention The CNC takes into account parameter P617 6 from version 3 3 on On previous versions the CNC acts as if P617 6 0 Page Chapter 2 Section BASIC OPERATIONS AXES JOG 2 3 2 INCREMENTAL JOG With this option it is possible to jog the desired axis and in the desired direction a distance selected by the JOG positions of the FEED switch on the operator panel The feedrate used in these incremental moves is set by the machine manufacturer The positions available at this switch are 1 10 100 1000 and 10000 which indicate the number of units to be moved These units are those used in the display format Example Switch position 0 001 mm or 0 0001 inch 0 010 mm or 0 0010 inch 0 100 mm or 0 0100 inch 1 000 mm or 0 1000 inch 10 000 mm or 1 0000 inch After selecting the desired switch position every time the jog key is pressed the axis will move the indicated amount and in the chose
189. higher than 100 C 232 F and do not short the battery leads 064 External emergency input pin 14 of connector I O1 is activated 066 068 070 072 074 075 076 077 078 079 087 088 089 090 092 093 094 095 096 098 099 100 101 105 106 108 This error comes up if while probing G75 the programmed position is reached without receiving the probe signal X axis travel limit overrun Itis generated either because the machine is beyond limitor because a block has been programmed which would force the machine to go beyond limits Z axis travel limit overrun Itis generated either because the machine is beyond limit or because a block has been programmed which would force the machine to go beyond limits X axis following error Z axis following error S value spindle speed too large Feedback error at connector A1 Feedback error at connector A2 Feedback error at connector A3 Feedback error at connector A4 Feedback error at connector A5 Internal CNC hardware error Consult with the Technical Service Department Internal CNC hardware error Consult with the Technical Service Department All the axes have not been homed This error comes up when it is mandatory to search home on all axes after power up This requirement is set by machine parameter Internal CNC hardware error Consult with the
190. his register indicates the code pressed This value is maintained for 200 milliseconds unless another key is pressed before then This register may be canceled from the PLC after being processed R121 bit 1 Indicates that the Turning operation is selected 1 bit2 Indicates that the Facing operation is selected 1 bit3 Indicates that the Taper Turning operation is selected 1 bit 4 Indicates that the Rounding operation is selected 1 bit 5 Indicates that the Threading operation is selected 21 bit 6 Indicates that the Grooving operation is selected 21 bit 7 Indicates that the Profiling operation is selected 21 bit 8 Indicates that the Auxiliary Modes option is selected 21 bit 9 Indicates that the Tool Calibration option is selected 21 bit 10 Indicates that the Multiple Drilling operation is selected 21 bit 11 Indicates that the Simple Drilling Tapping operation is selected 1 bit 12 Indicates that the Slot milling key way operation is selected 1 bit 13 Indicates that the Tool Inspection mode is selected 21 bit 14 Indicates that the Graphic Simulation mode is selected 1 bit 16 Indicates that the mode for the following cycle parameters Finishing pass finishing feedrate finishing tool and safety distances on X and Z is selected 1 Version 6 8 March 1998 NEW LANGUAGES SWEDISH AND NORWEGIAN The languages that can be selected with machine parameter P99 are Spanish P9020 German P99 1 English
191. hown at the main window corresponds to the actual real spindle speed To set the spindle speed follow one of these procedures Press S key in the desired value and press ENTER This value is taken as the one to be used in the operation being edited Therefore it does not modify the actual spindle speed nor the S value displayed at the main window Press S key in the desired value and press The CNC modifies the actual real spindle speed updating the S value displayed at the main window This new values is also taken as the one to be used when executing the automatic operation being edited Percentage of the programmed spindle speed S currently applied MAX Maximum spindle speed in rpm when operating in CSS Spindle turning direction to be used when executing the cycle To change the turning direction to be used when executing the cycle press 3 The CNC will show the new selected direction but it will not modify the actual status of the spindle T The tool to be used when executing the cycle To select the number of the tool to be used during the cycle use one of the following methods Page Chapter 6 Section 8 PROFILES AUTOMATIC MODE CYCLE Press TOOL and after keying in the desired number press ENTER The CNC stores the new selected tool but it will maintain the previous one active Press TOOL and after keying in the desired number press The CNC selects the new
192. i 109 N100 G90 G01 X60 Z10 F300 To By means of the MFO on the CNC keyboard it is possible to override the programmed F between 0 and 120 or between 0 and gt 4 gt 100 depending on the setting of machine 10 50 Z parameter P600 3 If machine parameter P600 3 0 while keeping the rapid jog key y pressed the CNC applies 200 of the programmed F to a G01 move GOI is modal and incompatible with GOO G02 G03 and G33 G01 may also be programmed as G1 On CNC power up after executing an M02 M30 after an EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC assumes GOL Chapter 5 Section Page PATH CONTROL LINEAR INTERPOLATION 3 G01 5 5 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION G02 G03 G02 Clockwise circular interpolation G03 Counter clockwise circular interpolation Movements programmed after a G02 or G03 follow a circular path at the programmed feedrate The clockwise G02 and counter clockwise G03 directions have been defined according to the following criteria a Machine parameter P600 1 0 X E G0 gt a G0 G03 gt Z b Machine parameter P600 1 1 C D G03 O Goe G02 G03 Z X G02 and G03 are modal and incompatible with each other as well as with GOO GO1 and G33 MPTO3 X MPTO3B Functions G74 G75 or any canned cycle cancel G02 and G03 G02 and G03 may also be programmed as G2 and G3 The cartesian coordinate format for a
193. ies tool radius compensation on the finishing pass Therefore it is necessary to indicate at the tool offset table the value of the tool tip radius and the location code of the tool tool shape to be used in this operation 5 1 2 1 MACHINING CONDITIONS The information shown at the main window when selecting the automatic mode CYCLE is the following When operating in Constant Surface Speed F CSS MAX T When not operating in Constant Surface Speed F CSS T The meaning of each one of these fields is F Currently selected axis feedrate Currently applied override to the programmed axis feedrate F CSS Constant Surface Speed to execute the cycle RPM Spindle speed to execute the cycle Both values are the ones currently selected to execute the cycle and the S value shown at the main window corresponds to the actual real spindle speed Page Chapter 5 Section 2 AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS INTRODUCTION To set the spindle speed follow one of these procedures Press S key in the desired value and press ENTER This value is taken as the one to be used in the operation being edited Therefore it does not modify the actual spindle speed nor the S value displayed at the main window Press S key in the desired value and press The CNC modifies the actual real spindle speed updating the S value displayed at the main window This new values is also taken as the one to be used when execut
194. illing Operating Manual Section 5 9 Date December 1993 Software Version 3 2 and newer FEATURES Assign a 5 digit number to the part program Save part programs out to a peripheral Automatic operation Slot milling Delay before opening the positioning loop Special modes accessing password Handwheel inactive when Feedrate Override Switch out of handwheel positions AFFECTED MANUAL AND SECTION Operating Manual Operating Manual Operating Manual Installation Manual Installation Manual Installation Manual Chapter 7 Section 7 7 Section 5 10 Section 4 3 2 Section 3 7 Section 4 3 2 Date July 1994 Software Version 4 1 and newer FEATURE Linear and Bell shaped spindle acc dec Profile with without corner rounding Threading operation also with thread exit Rapid jog at 20096 or depending on the position of the Feedrate Override Switch Tool inspection Execution of program 99996 AFFECTED MANUAL AND SECTION Installation Manual Operating Manual Operating Manual Installation Manual Operating Manual Installation Manual Operating Manual Operating Manual Installation Manual Operating Manual Section 5 8 Section 6 2 Section 5 6 2 Section 4 3 3 Section 2 3 1 Section 3 4 3 Section 3 4 3 Section 5 1 3 Section 3 11 Section 3 10 Date January 1995 Software version 5 1 and newer FEATURE M3 M44 confirmation by detecting
195. in the following cases When the result of an operation is equal to zero Example N001 P1 P3F2K5 If P325 f both sides of a comparison are identical Example N002 P1 F11 K8 If P1 28 The Less than condition is also referred to as Negative and it is activated in the following cases When the result of an operation is less than zero negative Example N001 P1 P3F2K5 IfP3 5 When the first operand in a comparison is smaller than second one Example N002 P1 F11 K8 If P1 8 Atention condition flags N Assignments and non parametric functions do not alter the status of the Programming example N060 P2 F11 K22 N065 G01 X10 N070 Y20 N071 G26 N100 N072 G28 N200 N073 G29 N300 Block N060 does a comparison Blocks N65 and N70 do not change the condition flags Thus If P2 22 the program continues at block N100 If P2 22 the program continues at block N200 If P2 22 the program continues at block N300 Care must be taken when programming functions G26 and G29 If in the above example the following were programmed instead N071 G28 N200 N072G29 N300 N073 G26 N100 The program would not execute NO73 With P2 22 it would jump to N200 and with P2 2 22 it would jump to N300 Thus skipping block N073 Page Chapter 10 Section 8 PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING JUMP FUNCTIONS G26 G27 G28 G29 Parametric programming example to calculate the coordinates of the various
196. ing Structure of the part program and of all its blocks It shows the available preparatory G functions Chapter 2 Coordinate programming It shows how to select the work planes work units type of programming absolute incremental It describes the coordinate systems for coordinate programming Cartesian polar cylindrical by means of angles by means of an angle and a Cartesian coordinate Chapter 3 Reference systems It shows how to program machine reference search and coordinate preset as well as the zero offsets and polar origin preset It indicates how to save the current coordinate origin and retrieve it later on Chapter 4 Other functions It shows how to program the preparatory functions regarding axis feedrate and spindle speed How to program the spindle turning speed rpm CSS How to program spindle orientation How to program the tool and how to modify the table values via user program How to program the auxiliary M functions Chapter 5 Path control It describes how to program the part in square and round corner How to program fast positioning linear and circular interpolations How to program tangential entries and exits as well as corner rounding and chamfering How to program threading and movement against hardstop Chapter 6 Additional Preparatory Functions It shows how to program a dwell How to apply mirror image functions How to display an error code How to work with jumps and unconditional jumps How to
197. ing in position 13 of the tool table N4 P28 F27 P5 P28 takes the R value appearing in the tool table position indicated by the value of P5 F28 This function may be programmed in two different ways N4 P17 F28 K10 P17 takes the I value appearing in position 10 of the tool table N4 P19 F28 P63 P19 takes the I value appearing in the tool table position indicated by the value of P63 F29 This function may be programmed in two different ways N4 P15 F29 K27 P15 takes the K value appearing in position 27 of the tool table N4 P13 F29 P25 P13 takes the K value appearing in the tool table position indicated by the value of P25 One block may contain all the desired assignments and operations as long as they do not modify more than 15 parameters Page Chapter 10 Section 6 PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING OPERATORS F17 through F29 10 4 BINARY OPERATORS F30 THROUGH F33 The available binary operations are F30 Logic AND function F31 Logic OR function F32 Logic XOR function F33 Logic NOR function These BINARY operations also activate the internal flags depending on the results oftheir operations for later use when programming CONDITIONAL JUMPS CALLS G26 G27 G28 G29 Binary operations may be performed between Parameters P1 P2 F30 P3 Parameters and constants P11 P25 F31 H 8 Constants P19 K2 F32 K5 The H value must be a positive hexadecimal number of up to 8 characters In other words it must be betwe
198. ing the automatic operation being edited Percentage of the programmed spindle speed S currently applied MAX Maximum spindle speed in rpm when operating in CSS Spindle turning direction to be used when executing the cycle To change the turning direction to be used when executing the cycle press 3 The CNC will show the new selected direction but it will not modify the actual status of the spindle T The tool to be used when executing the cycle To select the number of the tool to be used during the cycle use one of the following methods Press TOOL and after keying in the desired number press ENTER The CNC stores the new selected tool but it will maintain the previous one active Press TOOL and after keying in the desired number press Lu The CNC selects the new tool and assumes it for the automatic operation being edited It must be borne in mind that the CNC uses this tool for roughing and that it is possible to select another tool for the finishing pass Atention When storing an automatic operation the CNC stores all these machining conditions together with the values and parameters defining the cycle This way when executing a part previously stored the CNC will execute each one of the automatic operations with the tool spindle turning direction spindle speed finishing pass finishing tool and safety distances defined while editing it Chapter 5 Section Page AUTO
199. ing the axes follow these steps Press BEGIN or END depending on the point to be set 2 Press X to set this value 3 Enter the corresponding coordinate value for this axis 4 Press Z to set this value 5 Enter the corresponding coordinate value for this axis 6 Press ENTER The CNC will modify the coordinates corresponding to the selected axes If only one has been set the one for the other axis will not be changed Page Chapter 2 Section BASIC OPERATIONS BEGIN amp END 2 4 2 POSITIONING AT BEGIN OR END POINTS To move the tool up to the Begin or End point do the following Press BEGIN to move to this point or END to move to this other point Press 1 The CNC will move the tool to the selected point automatically and at the programmed feedrate When only one axis is to be moved follow these steps Press BEGIN to move to this point or END to move to this other point Press the key corresponding to the axis to be moved X or Z Press 58 The CNC will move the tool to the selected point along that axis automatically and at the programmed feedrate The other axis will not move Chapter 2 Section Page BASIC OPERATIONS BEGIN amp END 9 2 5 ACTIVATING DEACTIVATING EXTERNAL DEVICES With this CNC it is possible to activate and deactivate 4 external devices including the coolant The other devices depend on the type of machine Thes
200. inishing pass with the finishing tool T at the selected F With A 100 The CNC runs ten 2mm passes the last of which is carried out with the finishing tool T at the selected F If F 100 the finishing pass is run at the same feedrate as the roughing passes Example 2 To remove 1mm setting N 1 With A 40 The CNC runs one 0 6mm pass plus one 0 4mm finishing pass with the finishing tool T at the selected F With A 100 and F 50 The CNC runs one 1mm pass with the finishing tool T at 50 of the programmed F With A 100 and F 100 The CNC runs one Imm pass with the finishing tool T at the programmed F Basic operation The taper turning operation may be executed from beginning to end without Y interruptions or a pass at a time by pressing K Once the proper data has been entered press so the CNC executes the taper turning operation Before starting to execute the part the CNC will calculate the real pass to be used along the X axis all the passes will be identical and the corresponding finishing pass Chapter 5 Section Page AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS TAPER TURNING 17 The machining steps will be the following 1 The spindle will start at the selected speed and turning direction 2 Ifthe cycle has been programmed to be executed with another tool the CNC will perform a tool change moving the axes to the tool change position if so required by the machine 3 The tool will approach
201. ion Page MACHINING CANNED CYCLES FACING WITH CURVED 39 THEN SECTIONS G85 8 17 LONGITUDINAL THREADCUTTING CYCLE G86 MPT85 Z Format N4 G86 P0 K P1 K P2 K P3 K P4 K P5 K P6 K P7 K P10 K P11 K P12 K Meaning of the parameters P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 Absolute X value of the starting point of the thread A in radius or diameters Absolute Z value of the starting point of the thread A Absolute X value of the final point of the thread B in radius or diameters Absolute Z value of the final point of the thread B Depth of the thread in radius If will have a positive value in external threads and a negative one in internal threads If it is zero error code 3 will be displayed Initial pass in radius It defines the depth of the first cutting pass The subsequent passes will depend on the sign given to the parameter Ifthe sign is positive the depth of the second pass will be P5 V2 and the depth of the 11th will be PS n until the finishing depth is reached Ifthe sign is negative the penetration increment will be constant and of a value equal to the absolute value of the parameter If the value is O error 3 will be issued Page Chapter 8 Section LONGITUDINAL 40 MACHINING CANNED CYCLES THREADCUTTING G86 P6 P7 P10 P11 P12 Safety distance in radius It indicates at what distance from the surface of the thread it starts returnin
202. ion they must be programmed with the center LK coordinates referred to the arc s starting point and with the relevant sign If functions F S T or M are programmed in the definition they will be ignored except for the finishing pass No polar definitions can be used 6 The cycle is completed on the starting position of the tool 0 7 Ifthe last movement prior to calling the canned cycle G68 has been executed in GOO tool radius compensation G41 G42 can be used Otherwise error 35 will be issued Page Chapter 8 Section 26 MACHINING CANNED CYCLES STOCK uix ALONG X Example G68 MPT77 NY N100 N110 G42 G00 X120 Z0 N120 G68 PO K0 P1 K 10 P5 K2 P7 K0 8 P8 K0 8 P9 K100 P13 K200 P14 K250 N130 G40 X130 Z10 N140 M30 N200 G03 X40 7 30 E 6 amp 2D ires iter it Profile definition N210 G01 X40 Z 40 N220 G02 X80 Z 60 125 K5 N230 G01 X80 Z 70 N240 X100 Z 80 N250 X100 Z 90 Chapter 8 Section Page MACHINING CANNED CYCLES STOCK A ALONG X 27 8 12 STOCK REMOVAL CANNED CYCLE ALONG Z G69 MPT78 Format N4 G69 P0 K P1 K P5 K P7 K P8 K P9 K P13 K P14 K Parameter meaning P0 X coordinate of the starting point A in radius or diameter P1 Z coordinate of the starting point A P5 Max step It must be greater than zero or error 3 will be issued The real step calculated by the CNC will be smaller than or equal to
203. is CNC offers the following features to comply with machine safety regulations Enabling of the CYCLE START key from the PLC This feature is available when machine parameter P619 7 1 PLC output O25 indicates whether the CYCLE START key is enabled 21 or not 20 Axes movements affected by Feed Hold It was already available Feed Hold input pin 15 of connector I O 1 must be normally high If while moving the axes the Feed Hold input is brought low the CNC keeps the spindle turning and stops the axes with OV or velocity command analog signal and keeping their enables ON When this signal is brought back up the CNC will resume the movement of the axes Axes jogging feedrate limited by PLC This feature is available when machine parameter P619 7 1 When activating PLC output O26 the CNC assumes the feedrate set by machine parameter P812 Handwheel managed by the PLC Machine parameter P623 3 indicates whether the axes movements with handwheels are affected by Feed Hold 21 or not 0 Machine parameter P622 1 indicates whether the multiplying factor indicated by the MFO switch position is applied 0 or the one indicated by the PLC outputs O44 and O45 1 already available Spindle control from the PLC This feature is available when P619 7 1 Output O27 1 tells the CNC to apply the spindle analog voltage set by the PLC The value of this analog signal is setatregister R156 a
204. is finishing pass it leaves the amount set by 96A for the finishing pass c Dwell at the bottom In order to achieve a good part finish the cutter will stay at the bottom of the groove for another 2 spindle turns d Withdrawal on X 5 If set for a finishing pass after the last grooving pass the CNC will run a final finishing pass to the whole groove Page Chapter 5 Section 36 AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS GROOVING gt Z 6 The tool positions at the cycle calling pass 7 The CNC stops the spindle Considerations If the BEGIN and END coordinates match neither along X nor along Z the CNC assumes it to be a cylindrical grooving and it takes as beginning point along X the one with the outmost X coordinate value Section Page Chapter 5 GROOVING 37 AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS 5 8 SIMPLE DRILLING TAPPING By means of this cycle it is possible to drill or tap a hole along the center line of the part X0 During this operation the spindle will work in the RPM mode and NOT at Constant Surface Speed To access this operation proceed as follows Y Press AUX select option 6 Other cycles and then Simple Drilling Tapping When in DRO mode press or PEEL and select the Simple Drilling Tapping option Once the new cycle has been selected The CNC will display the following data F1000 99100 RPM 1500 100 T3 Machining feedrate m min or m rev Percentage
205. is iini me HE 6 Section Page Ss Chapter 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS 54 5 1 1 SA xl 2 13 xL 5 1 4 5 14 1 5 2 22 S34 2 2 2 9 1 EE M 5 4 341 5 4 2 2 9 Sal 2A 2 9 5 5 6 5 6 1 2 5 2 5 7 5 8 3 9 59 5 10 2H Ink FoU BC DOE isses ose etre ore trea ak ER Dra VIPERA UR Y URS AAA IER HERE SAU UI 1 Automatic operations in Semi automatic mode esee 1 Automatic operations in automatic mode Cycle ree d Muchos ETE ONS cuisse aierab d NER RIDERS EN eie p bv FAND eade HA PER DE ER Epi ERN TER ANUS E IM 2 SMALA mS 4 Zoom PONCE ETE T A 5 EXCMO 6 Tool SEIS A A poU RU tedio pupa H Dd du FRU Rosie b pie Faser HANE Rp 7 TUTAE RE NR VR 8 Semi ums ME i D rne eE EO EEEE 8 Automatic tating Cycle TOME T 9 n qe C Tr HELM 12 eonun ECC Ai 12 Atomatic facing Cycle MOJE mem 13 Taper WHr A 15 Semmaltomallo taper UNDE ii abe aee e ir sdb Hae cUp pr dod aud ERN ud 15 Automatic taper tmine Cycle OG iue seeker terere ii 16 deuil M II 19 Senmi automatic Fonde sn AAA pea 19 Automate rounding Cycle Mal ini 2l Automa e prole rounding ci 25 a T 31 Semi automatic threading iius cocer epe A Ao CHOR FUR REGE UU QUE 31 Automate threading Cycle Mode iii di 32 giai D r E AA AAA AAA AAA 35 euren Fe rd ere rio dci 38 Programing GXeIIplOR us espe PRORA ROG ROBAR VEREOR pera 41 M l ple TOBA uiscera Ea E 42 Slot ITUNE esros 45 Usage of
206. is no key to select it do the following Select another data and then use the up and down arrow keys to select parameter H A Defines the distance between two consecutive passes If programmed with a value of 0 the CNC will issue the corresponding error message QT Defines the cutter angle indicating the angle between its edge with respect to the X axis as shown below To select it press Qt Page Chapter 6 Section 10 PROFILES AUTOMATIC MODE CYCLE aT 45 aT 45 If the angle of the cutter is less or equal to 45 the H and A values indicate the excess material and the pass along X On the other hand if the angle is greater than 45 the H and A values indicate the excess material and the pass along the Z axis Depending on the values of H A and QT the CNC always calculates the excess material and the pass along the X and Z axes a I I 1 I 1 Q A A RA X UE uH aT lt 45 aT 45 In order to obtain a good part finish the CNC applies tool compensation To do that it must know how the tool enters the profile and how it exits Those values are shown at the bottom right of the screen To select the way the tool enters the profile point P1 press the up arrow key and to select the way the tool exits the profile point P12 press the down arrow key When the part program window is being displayed press exit selection mode into from the profile to switch to t
207. is or Z axis and all the remaining points ofthe table must be offset by that amount Example Backlash Position Negative direction Backlash Position Operation Whenusing Variable Backlash Compensation the CNC operates with leadscrew error compensation and therefore it applies at all times the backlash compensation set in the table for that point and in the machining direction When the axis movement is reversed the CNC swaps graphs restoring or applying the amount of backlash compensation and direction corresponding to that point Version 5 7 July 1996 1 WORK ZONE EXCLUSION ZONE DETECTION When using this feature the CNC prevents the axes from exiting or entering this zone while jogging them with either the jog keys or the electronic handwheel The operator might suspect a malfunction since the CNC does not issue any message From this version on in these cases the CNC will behave as follows When the zone has been set as a Work Zone the CNC will set PLCI input 146 high when trying to exit the selected zone When the zone has been set as a Work Zone the CNC will set PLCI input I46 high when trying to enter the selected zone 2 RESUME EXECUTION AT MID PROGRAM If while a part the program is interrupted due to a power failure etc it is now possible to resume execution from the interrupted program on This way there is no longer need to repeat the whole program thus saving considerabl
208. ith respect to the new part zero and finally recover the initial part zero with G32 Functions G31 and G32 must be programmed alone in the block Their format is N4 G31 N4 G32 Where N4 Block number G31 Store current Part Zero G32 Retrieve Part Zero previously stored by means of G31 Example X A 60 M ae Lec on N 110 ye 30 T 2 Fe AT o le 100 120 7 X axis programmed in diameter Starting point X120 Z120 N110 X60 Z100 Approach the part N120 G31 Store part zero N130 G92 X0 ZO Zero offset N140 G01 X0 Z 10 Machining operation N150 G02 X0 Z 20 R5 Machining operation N160 G25 N130 150 3 Machining operation N170 G32 Retrieve original part zero N180 G00 X120 Z120 Return to starting point Page Chapter 3 Section STORE AND RETRIEVE 6 REFERENCE SYSTEMS PART ZERO G31 G32 4 OTHER FUNCTIONS 41 FEEDRATE PROGRAMMING F The meaning of F programmable feedrate varies depending on whether the machine operates in G94 or in G95 and also depending on whether mm or inches are being used The table below shows the differences Millimeters Programming units Minimum values Maximum values Fl Imm min Fl 1mm min F9999 0999mm min Fl Imm rev F0 0001 0 0001mm rev F500 500mm rev Inches Format Programming units Minimum values Maximum values Fl 0 linch min Fl 0 linch min F3937 393 Tinch min F1 linch rev F0 0001 0 0001inch
209. ition has been selected press one of the JOG keys corresponding to the axis to be jogged The selected axis will be highlighted on the screen When using a FAGOR handwheel with axis selector button the axis can be selected as follows Press the button located on the rear of the handwheel The CNC will select the first axis and it will show it highlighted on the screen f this button is pressed again the CNC will select the other axis and when pressed again it will select the previous one again and so forth fthis button is maintained pressed for more than 2 seconds the CNC will de select the axis The machine will move the selected axis as the handwheel is being turned in one direction or the other depending on the turning direction of the handwheel The machine has two electronic hand wheels The machine will move each one of the axes as the corresponding handwheel is turned according to the selected switch position and turning direction Page Chapter 2 Section 6 BASIC OPERATIONS AXES JOG 2 4 BEGINNING POINT BEGIN AND END POINT END With this CNC it is possible to set a beginning point BEGIN and an end point END to facilitate the machining tasks These points may be re defined as often as desired and may be used to set the ends of the part the boundaries limits of a particular machining area etc The CNC also offers functions which allow moving the tool automatically and at the program
210. kwise or counter clock wise How to work with spindle orientation angular positioning Chapter 5 Automatic operations Indicates how to select and program each automatic operation Operating modes Semi automatic and automatic How to select the machining conditions of the automatic operations How to execute and simulate an automatic operation Chapter 6 Profiles Semi automatic mode Shows how to gather points and move from point to point Automatic mode shows how to define the profile and how to execute it Introduction 7 Chapter 7 Working with parts Indicates how to access the part program directory How to select a part program edit it simulate it and execute it How to execute an operation previously stored in a part program How to modify a part program How to delete a part program How to operate with peripherals How tolock and unlock the part program memory Chapter 8 Programming examples Error codes Introduction 8 L CONCEPTS After powering the 800T CNC the monitor shows the CNC model name and the message GENERAL TEST Passed Press any key to access the CNC standard work mode If the GENERAL TEST was not successful the CNC will display the detected errors which must be corrected before operating with the machine 1 1 CRT DESCRIPTION The CRT of this model is divided into the following areas or display windows X 0000 950 oiamerer Z 0000 84 S1217 T08 B amp hwwv RANGE 1 F 00
211. lates the P1 coordinates Programming example where PO X40 Z50 is the starting point and the X axis is programmed in diameter x1 N100 A135 A153 435 N110 X100 Z10 50 1 A7 Po Rico A1 135 20 Po A gt 5 10 50 Z Page Chapter 2 Section 6 COORDINATE PROGRAMMING BY TWO ANGLES A1 A2 2 3 4 BY ONE ANGLE AND ONE CARTESIAN COORDINATE It is also possible to define a point by means of the exit angle of the path at the previous point and one cartesian coordinate of the point to be defined Programming example where PO X20 Z80 is the starting point and the X axis is programmed in diameter In absolute coordinates x1 N100 G90 N110 A116 565 X60 N120 A180 Z60 N130 A135 X80 N140 A180 Z40 Bf N150 A153 435 X100 N160 A135 Z10 40 133 43 3 18 In incremental coordinates 30 N100 G91 N110 A116 565 X40 N120 A180 Z 10 N130 A135 X20 N140 A180 Z 10 N150 A153 435 X20 A N160 A135 Z 10 1 20 4 5 60 70 80 Z 116 565 10 PT64 When defining points by two angles or by one angle and one coordinate it is possible to insert roundings chamfers tangential entries and exits D 10 40 80 Z MPT65 Starting point PO X20 Z80 N100 G01 G36 R10 A116 A180 N110 G39 R5 X60 Z40 N120 G36 R10 A90 X100 N130 A180 Z10 Chapter 2 Section Page ONE ANGLE AND ONE COORDINATE PROGRAMMING CARTESIAN COORDINATE 7 3 REFERENCE SYSTEMS 3 1 MA
212. les from and to the CNC Delete part programs at the CNC Certain remote control of the machine Atention A N At the CNC any operating mode may be selected Chapter 3 Section AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS PERIPHERALS 3 9 LOCK UNLOCK With this option it is possible to lock unlock the part program memory To access this option press AUN the key corresponding to the LOCK UNLOCK option The codes used to do this are N0000 ENTER Unlocks the part program memory N1111 ENTER Locks the part program memory PF000 ENTER Erases all the arithmetic parameters data for automatic operations setting them to 0 and after selecting the Auxiliary modes press Chapter 3 Section AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS LOCK UNLOCK Page 15 3 10 EXECUTION SIMULATION OF PROGRAM P99996 To select this option press AUX and after selecting Auxiliary Modes press the key corresponding to EXECUTION OF PROGRAM P99996 Program P99996 is a special user program in ISO code It may be edited written at the CNC or at a PC and then be sent to the CNC via the Peripherals option Once this option has been selected it is possible to execute or simulate this program To simulate program P99996 press at the compact CNC model and at the modular CNC model The way to operate in either case is described next Page Chapter 3 Section 16 AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS EXECUTION S
213. letely cylindrical the CNC analyzes the X coordinates of the BEGIN and END points and it takes as beginning point the one with the outmost X coordinate value 8050205 An inside turning operation is defined in the same way as an outside one Therefore the CNC analyzes the programmed end diameter and the BEGIN coordinate in order to tell the type of turning operation to carry out Z CEEOL Om ELL CMD I yy AA CMLL n SN NN ANNY NNNSNN NN OSI SISI INN INIA S IN NS S OS ON N INS NN SS ISS SS AN 8050206 OS S Chapter 5 Section Page AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS TURNING 11 5 3 FACING Y This option is selected by pressing and it makes it possible to face the programmed section To select either the Semiautomatic or the Automatic Cycle mode press Or at the compact model 5 3 1 SEMI AUTOMATIC FACING BEGIN END 3050301 gt Z It uses the BEGIN and END values The CNC displays the selected values and allows to select new ones if so desired The X axis movements will be made by means of either a mechanical handwheel the electronic handwheel or the JOG keys on the operator panel The Z axis movements will be carried out by using the following keystroke sequences Moves the Z axis only up to the BEGIN point Moves the Z axis only up to the END point Page C
214. llowing formats P46 1724 9281 Decimal notation P47 10842021 E 2 Scientific notation Where E 2 means 10 1 100 Therefore the two types of notation for the same parameter below have the same value P47 0 001234 P47 0 1234 E 2 P48 1234 5678 P48 1 2345678 E3 Chapter 3 Section Page EXECUTION SIMULATION AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS P99996 21 3 10 2 SIMULATION OF PROGRAM P99996 With this CNC it is possible to check program P99996 in dry run before executing it To do this press at the compact model and at the modular model The screen shows a graphic page The lower left hand side of the screen shows the axes of the plane To define the display area proceed as follows Press snm at the compact model and Aux at the modular model Indicate the XZ coordinates of the position to be displayed at the center of the screen Set the width of the display area After keying in each value press ENTER gest Width To check the part press This will start the corresponding graphic simulation Press CLEAR to clear the screen and END to quit the simulation mode Page Chapter 3 Section 22 AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS D E 3 10 2 1 ZOOM FUNCTION With this function it is possible to enlarge or reduce the whole graphic representation or part of it To do this the simulation of the program must be either interrupted or finished Press Z The screen will show a re
215. lue of 2 if set for diameter NAP1 T This CNC has an internal clock which keeps track of the program execution running time Pl takes the current value of this clock always in hundredths of a second In order to find out the execution time required by some parts or operations include this type of blocks at the beginning and end of the program section to be timed and then subtract the obtained values N4 P1 0X P1 takes the current theoretical X axis coordinate referred to Machine Reference Zero home N4 P1 0Z P1 takes the current theoretical Z axis coordinate referred to Machine Reference Zero home Page Chapter 10 Section PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING ASSIGNMENTS 10 2 OPERATORS Fl through F16 F1 Addition Example N4 P1 P2 F1 P3 P1 takes the value resulting from adding P2 and P3 That is P1 P2 P3 It may also be programmed as N4 P1 2 P2 F1 K2 which means that P1 takes the value of P2 2 The letter K indicates that it is a constant When the same parameter appears as an addend and a result N4 P1 P1 F1 K2 it indicates that from this moment on it increments its value by 2 P1 P1 2 F2 Subtraction N4 P10 P2 F2 P3 P10 P2 P3 N4 P102 P2 F2 K3 P10 P2 3 N4 P10 P10 F2 K1 P10 P10 1 F3 Multiplication N4 P17 P2 F3 P30 P17 P2 x P30 N4 P17 P2 F3 K4 P17 P2x4 NA P17 P17 F3 K8 P17
216. m pass with the finishing tool T at the programmed F Chapter 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS Section Page FACING 13 Basic operation The facing operation may be executed from beginning to end without interruptions or a pass at a time by pressing Once the proper data has been entered press so the CNC executes the facing operation Before starting to execute the part the CNC will calculate the real pass to be used along the Z axis to be used all the passes will be identical and the corresponding finishing pass The machining steps will be the following 1 2 3 The spindle will start at the selected speed and facing direction If the cycle has been programmed to be executed with another tool the CNC will perform a tool change moving the axes to the tool change position if so required by the machine The tool will approach the Begin point keeping the selected safety distance from it along the X and Z axes XA 8050303 Every roughing pass is performed as indicated in the illustration starting from point 1 going through points 2 3 and 4 and ending at point 5 Once the roughing operation has concluded the CNC runs the finishing pass as indicated below and the facing operation will end at the cycle calling point xa 8050304 gt Z The feedrate for the finishing pass is defined by the of the current programmed feedrate If the cycle does not have a finishing pass the tool
217. manually once it has been changed press to resume the execution of the operation The CNC carries out the machining defined in the automatic operation Once the automatic operation has concluded the spindle stops and the axes return to their position prior to pressing To interrupt the program press Once interrupted the following keys are enabled 23 5 53 fa 5 To resume execution press Page Chapter 5 Section AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS INTRODUCTION 5 1 4 1 TOOL INSPECTION With this option it is possible to interrupt the execution of an automatic operation and inspect the tool to check its status and change it if necessary To do this follow these steps a b c d e Press to interrupt the execution of the automatic operation Press TOOL At this time the CNC executes the miscellaneous function MOS to stop the spindle and it displays the following message on the screen JOG KEYS AVAILABLE OUT Move the tool to the desired position by using the JOG keys Once the tool is out of the way the spindle may be started and stopped again by its corresponding keys at the Operator Panel Once the tool inspection or replacement is completed press END The CNC will execute an M03 or M04 function to start the spindle in the direction it was turning when the execution was interrupted the screen will display the following message RETURN AXES OUT OF
218. med speed to the Begin and End points When some of the automatic operations are selected these movements will be carried out as follows For example if the turning operation is selected the movements to the Begin and End points will be performed only along the Z axis regardless of the X value set for those points This way it is possible to perform semi automatic machining operations For example if the machining operations are limited by means of the BEGIN and END points the operator can manually control the tool penetration at each pass and command the CNC to control the machining and withdrawal moves Chapter 2 Section Page BASIC OPERATIONS BEGIN amp END 7 2 4 1 BEGIN AND END POINT SETTING Positioning the machine Move the axes to the desired point by means of the mechanical or electronic handwheel or the JOG keys of the Operator Panel Follow these keystroke sequences to set the BEGIN and END points BEGIN ENTER IEND ENTER The CNC assumes as the new X and Z coordinates of the BEGIN or END points the values currently being displayed BEGIN X gt BEGIN Z END X END Z ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER 29 LL 29 29 LI Only the coordinate of the selected axis is modified The value of the other axis does not change Without moving the axes From the keyboard When the Begin or End point is set only by keyboard entry without mov
219. metric one 9 3 CALLING A STANDARD SUBROUTINE G20 A standard subroutine may be called upon from any program or other subroutine standard or parametric To do this G20 must be used The structure of a calling block is N4 G20 N2 2 N4 Block number G20 Calling a subroutine N2 2 Thetwo digits to the left of the period identify the subroutine being called upon 00 through 99 The two digits to the right of the period indicate the number of times that subroutine is to be executed 00 through 99 The number of times may also be programmed by an arithmetic parameter between PO and P255 For example N4 G20 N10 P123 If the number of times is not programmed the CNC will execute it only once The block calling the standard subroutine may not contain any other information Page Chapter 9 Section STANDARD SUBROUTINE 2 SUBROUTINES G20 G22 9 4 IDENTIFICATION OF A PARAMETRIC SUBROUTINE G23 A parametric subroutine always starts with a block containing a G23 The structure of this first block is N4 G23 N2 N4 Block number G23 Defines the beginning of a parametric subroutine N2 Identifies the subroutine number between NO and N99 This block cannot contain any additional information Program all the desired blocks after this first subroutine block and remember that a parametric subroutine may also contain parametric blocks A subroutine must always end with a block of the type N4 G24 This
220. min ft min by means of the S4 code It is programmed in m min ft min when operating at Constant Surface Speed Any integer value non decimal between SO and S9999 may be programmed This maximum value is limited by the actual maximum value set for each particular machine by the corresponding machine parameter Consult the instructions manual for your particular machine The programmed spindle speed may be varied between 50 and 120 by the corresponding keys of the CNC front panel as long as no threading operation is taking place G33 G86 or G87 When operating in G96 at Constant Surface Speed the possible S values are S0 S3047 0 m min 3047 m min S0 S9999 0 ft min 9999 ft min Spindle orientation When programming 4 3 after M19 the 4 3 code means the spindle orientation in degrees as counted from the spindle reference pulse home The CNC will output an analog voltage set by machine parameters P606 2 and P702 until the spindle reaches the angular position indicated by S4 3 4 2 1 SPINDLE S IN rev min G97 From the moment G97 is programmed the CNC assumes the programmed values S4 to be in rpm If when programming G97 no spindle speed is programmed the CNC assumes the current spindle speed as the programmed value Function G97 is modal and is cancelled by G96 On power up the CNC assumes function G97 Chapter 4 Section Page SPINDLE SPEED AND ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS SPINDLE ORIENTATI
221. modal which means that once programmed it remains active until G95 is programmed 4 1 2 FEEDRATE IN mmvr rev or inches rev G95 Fromthe moment G95 is programmed the CNC assumes that all the programmed feedrate values are in mm rev 3 4 or in inches rev units F2 4 The maximum programmable values are 500mm rev F500 and 19 685 inches rev F19 685 Function G95 is modal which means that once programmed it remains active until G94 is programmed 4 1 3 PROGRAMMABLE FEEDRATE OVERRIDE G49 By means of function G49 it is possible to indicate the override to be applied on to the programmed feedrate When G49 is active the Manual Feedrate Override switch of the operator panel has no effect The programming format is G49 K 1 120 G49 K is followed by the amount to be applied as feedrate override which must be an integer between 1 and 120 Function G49 is modal that is once the has been programmed it is maintained until another 46 value is programmed or this function is cancelled To cancel this function program either G49 K or G49 alone This function is also cancelled when executing an M02 M30 RESET or EMERGENCY Function G49 K must be programmed alone in the block Page Chapter 4 Section 2 ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS FEEDRATE o NU 42 SPINDLE SPEED AND SPINDLE ORIENTATION S The S code has two meanings a b Spindle speed The spindle speed is programmed directly in rpm or mm
222. modify them Indicates the reference systems to be set How to reference the machine and how to preset coordinates How to operate with absolute and incremental coordinates Chapter 2 Basic operations Simple description of the operating modes available at the CNC Screen description Description of the display units and how to change them Indicates how to select the axis feedrate How to select the working tool and the live tool How to jog the machine with jog keys or with the electronic handwheel How to select the starting point BEGIN and the end point END How to position the tool at the BEGIN or END point How to activate and deactivate external devices Chapter 3 Auxiliary functions Indicates how to select working units mm inches How to select radius or diameter work modes How to select feedrate units mm min mm rev How to set the tool table How to calibrate and inspect tools How to define the finishing pass for the automatic operations How to define the safety distance for automatic operations How to select and define the automatic operations Simple drilling multiple drilling and slot milling How to operate with peripherals How to lock and unlock the program memory How to edit execute and simulate program 99996 Chapter 4 Spindle Indicates how to select the spindle operating mode How to operate the spindle in rpm or CSS mode How to change gears manually and automatically How to select the spindle turning direction cloc
223. n 3 The CNC shows the Command Actual and To go coordinates of the axes and at the top of the screen the values of the Arithmetic parameters 2 The CNC displays the Following Error axis lag in large characters 1 The CNC displays the actual axis position in large characters 0 The CNC returns to the standard display 3 WORK ZONE EXCLUSION ZONE With this feature it is possible to select a predefined zone as work zone or exclusion zone from the PLCI Requirements This application requires an 800TI or 800TGI CNC model since one must use outputs O46 and O47 of the PLCI to set the zone as work zone or exclusion zone Parameter setting Machine parameter P622 5 indicates whether the CNC allows setting a work zone or an exclusion zone P622 5 P622 5 0 This feature is not available 1 This feature is available When using this feature P622 5 1 the following machine parameters must also be setto define the zone to be considered either as work zone or exclusion zone P902 Most positive X coordinate P903 Least positive X coordinate P904 Most positive Z coordinate P905 Least positive Z coordinate The CNC must be turned off and back on in order for the new parameter values to be assumed Selection Once all machine parameters have been set PLCI outputs O46 and O47 must be used to select the predefined zone either as a work zone or as an exclusion zone PLCI Output PLCI Output 046 0
224. n displaying the selected E j operation with all its parameters 6 When ending an operation the tool is positioned at the BEGIN point of this operation maintaining the safety 7 distances This point is also the beginning point for the next operation Once the execution of each operation has finished the tool is positioned at the BEGIN point of the executed operation maintaining the safety distances When defining the various operations it must be borne in mind that the tool moves in a straight line from one operation to the next and from the BEGIN point of the last operation to the BEGIN point of the next one The part program ends when a free position is found even if there are more operations defined in later blocks Once all the operations have been executed the tool will return to the point where the execution of the part program began To interrupt the program press Once interrupted the following keys are enabled To resume execution press Note It must be borne in mind that the CNC always executes what is defined in the editing area bottom of the screen Therefore the cursor must be positioned over the part s header PART 01346 before pressing If when pressing the cursor is positioned over one of the automatic operations the CNC executes the operation appearing on the general screen Page Chapter 7 Section 6 RT PR RAM PART PROGRAM WORKING WITH PA OG S EXECUTION 7 5 1 EX
225. n direction Chapter 2 Section Page BASIC OPERATIONS AXES JOG 5 2 3 3 AXES JOG VIA ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL With this option it is possible to jog the axes of the machine by means of an electronic handwheel To do this first select any of the positions at the FEED switch of the Operator Panel which correspond to the electronic handwheel The available positions are 1 10 and 100 which indicate the multiplying factor to be applied to the pulses coming from the electronic handwheel This way and after applying this factor the desired distance units are obtained for axis jog These units correspond to the display units being used Example Handwheel resolution 250 pulses per turn Distance jogged per tum 1 0 250 mm or 0 0250 inch 10 2 500 mm or 0 2500 inch 25 000 mm or 2 5000 inches Depending on the setting of machine parameter P617 5 the CNC behaves as follows at the rest of the positions of the Feedrate Override Switch of the operator panel P617 5 0 The axes may be jogged with the handwheel as if the MFO switch were at the x1 position P617 5 1 The axes may not be jogged with the handwheel When attempting to move an axis faster than the feedrate value set by machine parameters P110 and P310 the CNC will limit it to those values ignoring the rest of the handwheel pulses thus preventing any following errors from being issued The machine has one electronic handwheel Once the desired switch pos
226. nate of the END point in the selected units in radius or diameter P103 Z coordinate of the END point P4 Turning pass D It must have a positive radius value If programmed with a 0 value the CNC will assume parameter P5 number of roughing passes If both P4 and P5 are equal to 0 the CNC will issue the corresponding message P6 Final diameter f to be obtained in the turning operation P19 Safety distance along the X axis always in radius P20 Safety distance along the Z axis Parameters related to the finishing pass If no finishing pass is desired set P22 KO and P23 KO P22 Percentage 96 of programmed roughing pass used as finishing pass P23 Percentage of programmed roughing feedrate used as finishing feedrate Parameters related to the finishing tool When using one roughing tool and a different finishing tool set the following parameters When using the same tool for roughing and finishing set P262 K0 Page Chapter 8 Section 4 FACING MACHINING CANNED CYCLES G67 NI P26 Indicates the finishing tool to be used If the manufacturer has set a tool change position arithmetic parameters P190 and P191 the axes will move to that position to change the tool If the manufacturer has not set a tool change position arithmetic parameters P134 and P135 must be set for tool change position P134 Xcoordinate of the tool withdrawal point at the end of the cycle Itis setin the
227. nce for drilled out material removal 6 3 Rapid approach to P 1mm 6 4 Drill the next P increment at the programmed F Thus travelling P 1mm 6 5 Repeat steps 6 2 6 3 and 6 4 until the END is reached Stays at the bottom of the hole for 400msec in order to improve hole finish Rapid withdrawal to BEGIN Safety Distance for drilled out material removal Depending on the N value number of holes 9 1 Orients the spindle to current angular position A 9 2 Repeats drilling steps 6 7 and 8 Returns to where was pressed The CNC stops the live tool Atention Depending on the coordinates given to BEGIN and END the holes will be drilled along the X axis on the cylindrical surface of the part or along the Z axis on the face of the part Chapter 5 Section Page AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS MULTIPLE DRILLING 43 zw 20 BEGIN DO y X 30 z BEGINS 3 X 20 a erno 20 Z In order for this cycle to run either the X coordinates of both BEGIN and END points or their Z coordinates must be the same Otherwise this CNC will issue an error Example Five 20mm deep holes are to be drilled The first one is located at 90 and the other four at 45 from each other They are also located at a diameter of 35mm A live tool turning at 2000 rpm is being used XA Safety DistanceX 0 000 Safety Distance Z 3 000 Page Chapter 5 Section 44 AUTO
228. nction to start the spindle in the direction it was turning when the program was interrupted The screen will display the following message RETURN AXES OUT OF POSITION Axes out of position means that they are not at the position where the program was interrupted Jog the axes to the program interruption position by means the corresponding jog keys The CNC will not allow to move them passed overtravel this position When the axes are in position the screen will display RETURN AXES OUT OF POSITION NONE Press to resume the execution of program P99996 Page Chapter 7 Section WORKING WITH PART PROGRAMS PART PROGRAM EXECUTION 7 6 PART PROGRAM MODIFICATION To modify an operation select the corresponding part program position the cursor over the desired operation and press RECALL The CNC recovers all the values stored with that operation and it displays them at the bottom of the screen From this moment the operation may be modified as any normal operation and in the manner described in the section about AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS Once all the modifications have been made press ENTER to store it again in memory and verify that it works properly Once ENTER has been pressed the CNC requests the confirmation of the command Press ENTER again to confirm it replace option To delete an operation select the corresponding part program position the cursor over the desired operation an
229. nd G92 which must be programmed alone in a block for being special If incompatible G functions are programmed in the same block the CNC assumes the last one Chapter 1 Section Page PROGRAM WRITING PREPARATORY 5 FUNCTIONS G 2 e COORDINATE PROGRAMMING 2 1 MEASURING UNITS MILLIMETERS G71 OR INCHES G70 The CNC has machine parameter P13 to set the measuring units to be used However these units may be changed along the program by means of the following G functions G70 Programming in inches G71 Programming in millimeters Depending on whether G70 or G71 has been programmed the CNC assumes those units for all the following blocks Functions G70 G71 are modal and incompatible with each other On power up after an M02 M30 RESET or EMERGENCY the CNC assumes the measuring units set by machine parameter P13 Chapter 2 Section Page MILLIMETERS G71 COORDINATE PROGRAMMING INCHES G70 1 PT56 2 20 ABSOLUTE G90 INCREMENTAL G91 PROGRAMMING The coordinates of a point may be programmed either in absolute G90 or in incremental G91 When working in G90 the coordinates of the programmed point are referred to the coordinate origin point When working in G91 the coordinates of the programmed point are referred to the end point target point of the previous block On power up after executing an M02 M30 EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC assumes function G90 F
230. nd sent to the CNC by mark M1956 R156 0000 1111 1111 1111 gt 10V R156 0001 1111 1111 1111 gt 10V R156 0000 0111 1111 1111 224 5V R156 0001 0111 1111 1111 gt SV R156 0000 0011 1111 1111 gt 2 5V R156 0001 0011 1111 1111 gt 2 5V R156 0000 0000 0000 0000 gt OV R156 0001 0000 0000 0000 gt OV Also PLC output 043 lets you control the rotation of the spindle Already available It must be normally low If itis brought up the CNC stops the spindle When it is brought back up the CNC restarts the spindle Information for the PLC on the status of the machine reference home search I88 Home search in progress I100 Xaxis home search done I101 Z axis home search done 10 L 2 3 Additional CNC information for the PLC R120 The Lower half of this register indicates the code pressed This value is maintained for 200 milliseconds unless another key is pressed before then This register may be canceled from the PLC after being processed R121 bit1 Indicates that the Turning operation is selected 1 bit2 Indicates that the Facing operation is selected 21 bit3 Indicates that the Taper Turning operation is selected 21 bit4 Indicates that the Rounding operation is selected 21 bit5 Indicates that the Threading operation is selected 21 bit6 Indicates that the Grooving operation is selected 21 bit 7 Indicates that the Profiling operation is selected 1 bit 8 Indic
231. nding radius or greater is required i gt If the tangential exit is to be applied to an arc G02 G03 The tangential exit must be defined in a linear block 043 Polar origin coordinates G93 defined incorrectly 044 Function M45 S programmed wrong speed of the live tool 045 Function G36 G37 G38 or G39 programmed incorrectly 046 Polar coordinates defined incorrectly 047 A zero movement has been programmed during radius compensation or corner rounding 048 Start or cancel tool radius compensation while in G02 or G03 049 Chamfer programmed incorrectly 050 Constant Surface Speed has been selected while the machine uses the BCD coded spindle speed output 054 There is no tape in the cassette reader or the reader head cover is open or there is no disk in the FAGOR Floppy Disk Unit 055 Parity error when reading or writing a cassette or a disk 057 Write protected tape or disk 058 Sluggish tape or disk movement 059 CNC communication error with the cassette reader or FAGOR Floppy Disk Unit 060 Internal CNC hardware error Consult with the Technical Service Department 061 Battery error The memory contents will be kept for 10 more days with the CNC off from the moment this error occurs The whole battery module located on the back must be replaced Consult with the Technical Service Department Atention Due to danger of explosion or combustion do not try to recharge the battery do not expose it to temperatures
232. nned cycle with curved sections O85 iiie seriet e eterno ck temes cose iae toedesues 38 8 17 Longitudinal threadcutting canned cycle GOY use ee rent terae ipe derer Ree sheets 40 PRENNE Chapter 9 SUBROUTINES 24 Special program PODSO for user subroutines disnei 1 9 2 Identification of a standard subroutine G22 os scsscicsscscccsssscasaisedsedassescasacesssaatesdancance iaseate 2 9 3 Calling a standard subroutine G20 aaa 2 9 4 Identification of a parametric subroutine GIF ss ccscicsesacssssavaccsdsosaess sess annysins soso and acco sane vee 3 23 Calling paramento sobras G21 salia 3 9 6 i ndi e 4 Ss PEER aa 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 Chapter 10 PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING A 2 Opent PE tinus h PIG gereon N E 3 pcc e Ea ee ET E E 5 Amar operae FT O maeh POE Loue ee qe do eae peat He etel ask ta Li tede Dpto eb bae ieget 7 Rr Gi dT 7 Conditional jump functions G26 027 028 G29 iius ker rrr teer Seba Vere EV td E ERI E 8 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE 1 4 H H ERROR CODES COMPARISON TABLE FOR FAGOR 800T CNC MODELS AVAILABLE 800T CNC MODELS Compact model with 8 amber CRT Modular model with 9 amber Monitor Consisting of Central Unit Monitor and Keyboard Modular model with 14 Color Monitor Consisting of Central Unit Monitor and Keyboard ISI X Z axes control Spindle control Spindle in RPM Constant Surfac
233. ntly in execution Page Chapter 3 Section 4 REFERENCE SYSTEMS ZERO OFFSET G53 G59 Example MPT43 Assuming that the tool is positioned at X200 Z530 the X axis is programmed in radius and home is at XO ZO the path will be programmed as follows NIO N20 N30 N40 N50 N60 N70 N80 N90 N100 N110 N120 N130 N140 N150 N160 N170 N180 N190 G53 X0 Z340 G54 X0 Z170 G55 X0 Z0 G90 G01 F250 G53 X140 Z170 Z150 X160 Z130 G03 X160 Z90 I0 K 20 G08 X160 Z50 G01 X180 Z30 Z0 X140 G54 G25 N60 130 1 G55 G25 N60 120 1 G00 X200 Z530 M30 Load zero offset into the table Load zero offset into the table Load zero offset into the table Apply this particular zero offset Apply this particular zero offset Apply this particular zero offset Chapter 3 REFERENCE SYSTEMS Section Page ZERO OFFSET G53 G59 5 3 5 STORE AND RETRIEVE CURRENT PART ZERO G31 G32 G31 Store current Part Zero G32 Retrieve Part Zero previously stored by means of G31 With G31 it is possible to store the current part zero at any time and retrieve it later on by using function G32 This feature may prove useful whenever it is necessary to utilize several part zeros in the same program since it allows to dimension part of the program with respect to one zero store it with G31 change the part zero with G92 or G53 G59 dimension it w
234. o be preset X Z and then ENTER The CNC will request confirmation of the command press ENTER again Repeat this operation for the other axis Every time this operation is done the CNC assumes that point as the new coordinate origin 1 4 5 COORDINATE PRESET With this feature it is possible to preset the desired coordinate position values in order to use the coordinates relative to the blue prints of the workpiece without having to modify the various points of the part Also this type of preset may be used when it is more convenient to work from coordinate value towards zero instead of doing it from one coordinate value to the next as usual To preset a coordinate value follow these steps Press the key corresponding to the axis to be preset X Z Key in the desired position value for that point Press ENTER so the CNC assumes that preset value as the new position value coordinate for that axis The CNC will request confirmation of the command press ENTER again Repeat this operation for the other axis Every time a preset is done the CNC assumes a new Part Zero which will be located at a distance from the preset point equal to the preset value Page Chapter 1 Section 10 CONCEPTS REFERENCE SYSTEMS 1 5 OPERATION IN INCREMENTAL MODE With this CNC it is possible to set a Floating Zero or Incremental Zero besides the Part Zero described earlier in order to use coordinates relative to
235. oach to P 1mm thus positioned at 1 mm from the material 4 4 Drilling a distance P at programmed F Thus travelling P 1mm 4 5 Repeat steps 4 2 4 3 and 4 4 until the END position is reached 400msec dwell at the bottom of the hole in order to improve its finish Rapid withdrawal to BEGIN safety distance for drilled out material removal Rapid positioning to where was pressed The CNC stops the spindle Chapter 5 Section Page AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS SIMPLE DRILLING 39 Basic tapping operation X4 u gt Z lt Rapid move Move at programmed F 1 Starts the spindle at the indicated RPM and turning direction 2 If the cycle is to be executed with another tool the CNC will carry out a tool change by moving the axes to the tool change position if so required by the machine 3 Positions the tool at point XO part center at the set Z safety distance from the BEGIN point 4 Tap in motion to the END point at the programmed feedrate 5 Spindle turning reversal 6 Tap out movement withdrawal to BEGIN safety distance Z 7 Rapid traverse positioning to where 11 was pressed p Pp g 1 P 8 The CNC stops the spindle Page Chapter 5 Section 40 AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS TAPPING 5 8 1 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES Drilling A 20 mm hole is to be drilled on the face of the part along its center line using TOS and the spindle tu
236. of Feedrate Override A Spindle RPM No CSS Percentage of spindle speed override Drilling tool The CNC will show the BEGIN and END values currently available New ones may be selected if so desired The following data must also be defined P Maximum penetration at each drilling peck Set P 0 when tapping Tess To set the safety distances along X and Z p menu After setting both values press Or the CNC will display a new To quit this operation proceed as follows Press 7 or LESE to return to the Other automatic operations menu Other E P cycles Press Or again to return to the DRO mode Atention When using two spindles with slow direction reversal it is recommended to set machine parameter P617 7 1 M3 M4 confirmation by detecting spindle feedback reversal Page Chapter 5 Section 38 AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS SIMPLE DRILLING Basic simple drilling operation X4 lt Rapid move Move at programmed F Starts the spindle at the indicated RPM and turning direction Changes the tool if necessary Positions the tool in rapid over the BEGIN point X 0 at the safety distance from it as indicated for the Z axis Performs the drilling operation in the following steps 4 Movement at programmed F drilling a distance P 4 2 Rapid withdrawal to BEGIN safety distance in order to remove drilled out material 4 3 Rapid Appr
237. of the tool being used and on the sides of the cutter used for machining The following drawing shows the tool types commonly used on a lathe indicating in all of them the center C of the cutter and its theoretical tip P Chapter 3 Section Page AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS TOOL TABLE 3 Codes 0 and 9 X Z P 0 Code 1 E Code 7 a P Z P Z X Code 2 i Code 6 Ms c Z a Z X Code 3 i Code 5 a ns P Z P Z X Code 4 luos Code 4 a C 2 X Code 5 ed Code 3 E Z E Z c c X Code 6 a Code 2 p Z Z Je C X Code 7 i Code 1 Om Z s Z ct c zi X Code 8 i Code 8 i X Page Chapter 3 Section 4 AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS TOOL TABLE Tool length wear along the X axis It is given in diameter and in the units currently selected Its value range is I 32 766 mm or Izx1 2900 inches The CNC will add this value to the nominal tool length along the X axis to calculate the real total tool length X D Tool length wear along the Z axis It is given in the units currently selected Its value range is K 32 766 mm or K 1 2900 inches The CNC will add this value to the nominal tool length along the Z axis to calculate the real total tool length Z K 3 4 1 1 MODIFICATION OF TOOL DIMENSIONS To initialize a table by setting all the fields of each tool to 0 key in the following sequence R P N ENTER This CNC offers the option for TOOL CALI
238. ogrammed every time the arc center coordinates are to be absolute When using G06 the I value must be programmed either in radius or diameter depending on the setting of machine parameter P11 5 5 3 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES MPTOS Assuming absolute coordinate programming G90 and the X axis in diameter X4 60 194 036 20 R mer MPT06 KR D Starting Point PO X40 Z40 Cartesian coordinates N4 G02 X100 Z10 140 K10 Polar coordinates N4 G02 A194 036 140 K10 Radius programmin N4 G02 X100 Z10 R41 231 Programming with G06 N4 G02 G06 X100 Z10 1120 K50 Starting point PO X60 Z60 Cartesian coordinates N4 G03 X140 Z20 I 10 K 50 Polar coordinates N4 G03 A78 69 I 10 K 50 Radius programming N4 G03 X140 Z20 R50 99 Programming with G06 N4 G03 G06 X140 Z20 I40 K10 Page Chapter 5 PATH CONTROL Section CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION G02 G03 5 6 ARC TANGENT TO PREVIOUS PATH G08 By means of function G08 it is possible to program an arc tangent to the previous path without having to program its center coordinates I K The cartesian coordinate format is N4 G08 X 4 3 Z 4 3 in mm N4 G08 X 3 4 7 3 4 in inches N4 Block number G08 Code for the arc tangent to previous path X X coordinate of the end point of the arc Z Z coordinate of the end point of the arc The polar coordinate format is N4 G08 R 4 3 A 4 3 in mm N4 G08
239. ogramming Manual Programming Manual Section 6 4 Section 4 3 2 Section 3 10 Section 3 9 amp 7 9 Section 5 5 2 Section 5 7 Section 5 5 3 Section 5 5 3 Section 6 2 Section 6 2 Section 5 8 Section 3 8 3 1 Section 5 1 3 Section 3 11 Section 3 10 Section 3 10 Section 3 12 Section 3 11 Chapter 9 Section 4 3 4 Date March 1995 Software version 5 2 and newer FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND SECTION Editing of program P99996 in all models When interrupting the execution the following Installation Manual Section 3 11 keys are enabled spindle coolant O1 O2 O3 Operating Manual Section 3 10 and TOOL Operating Manual Section 5 1 4 Operating Manual Section 7 5 Incremental JOG movements taking current Installation Manual Section 4 3 3 work units radius or diameter into account ISO programming New functions G47 G48 Programming Manual Section 6 7 single block treatment ISO programming New function G86 Programming Manual Section 8 17 Longitudinal threadcutting canned cycle Request from the PLCI for real spindle rpm PLCI Manual Date November 1995 Software version 5 5 and newer FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND SECTION Tool offset modification while in execution Operating Manual Section 3 4 4 Operation with a single electronic handwheel Installation Manual Section 4 3 2 Installation Manual Section 7 5 Actual S speed reading from the PLCI PLCI Manual
240. ogramming can be used In the definition of the pattern no T function can exist The approaching and withdrawing movements are carried out in rapid and the rest at the programmed feedrate The cycle is completed on the starting position of the tool Tool radius compensation G41 G42 can be used The coordinates values X Z of the point from where the cycle is called must be different from PO and P1 respectively Otherwise error 4 will be generated The machining movements will be made at the programmed feedrate Page Chapter 8 Section 22 MACHINING CANNED CYCLES M E Example G66 X in diameter MPT7S N100 N110 G90 G00 G42 X150 Z115 N120 G66 PO0 K0 P1 K85 P4 K20 P5 K5 P7 K1 P8 K1 P9 K100 P12 K40 P13 K200 P14 K290 N130 G40 X160 Z135 N140 M30 IN200 6Cr36 R5 XML 5 etn tte net et a eee Profile pattern definition N210 X50 Z70 N220 X40 Z60 N230 G36 R2 X40 Z50 N240 G39 R2 X60 Z50 N250 X60 Z40 N260 G36 R2 X80 Z30 N270 G36 R10 X80 Z10 N280 G36 R2 X120 Z10 N290 X120 ZO Chapter 8 Section Page MACHINING CANNED CYCLES EDU UO 23 8 11 Format STOCK REMOVAL CANNED CYCLE ALONG X G68 MPT76 N4 G68 P0 K P1 K P5 K P7 K P8 K P9 K P13 K P14 K Meaning of the parameters P0 P1 P5 P7 PS P9 Absolute X coordinate value of the starting point A in radius or diameter Absolute Z coordinate value of the starting
241. om Imp Exp Ltda S o Paulo Brazil Fagor Automation Corp Elk Grove Village Chicago USA Fagor Automation West Coast Newport Beach California USA Fagor Automation East Coast New Jersey USA Fagor Automation Montreal Office Montreal Canada Fagor Automation Canada Mississauga Canada FAGOR New Features Ref 9902in Version 5 2 March 1995 I P621 4 DIVIDING FACTOR FOR ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL FEEDBACK Machine parameter P621 4 is used with P602 4 and P621 5 which indicate the multiplying factor for the electronic handwheel feedback signals for the 1st and 2nd axis respectively Machine parameter P627 1 indicates whether all handwheel feedback signals are to be divided or not P621 4 20 They are not divided P621 4 1 All handwheel feedback signals are divided by two Examples for the X axis so the CNC assumes 100 pulses turn with 25 50 and 100 line handwheels 25 line Fagor handwheel P602 4 0 and P621 4 0 25x4 1 100 lines 50 line Fagor handwheel P602 4 1 and P621 4 0 50x2 1 100 lines 100 line Fagor handwheel P602 4 1 and P621 4 1 100 x 2 2 100 lines Version 5 6 June 1996 l1 JOG WITH MASTER HANDWHEEL With this feature it is possible to jog the machine with the Master Handwheel once the path has been defined Requirements The control ofthe Jog with Master Handwheel is carried out with the Second Handwheel Therefore the machine must have two electronic handwh
242. om one point to the next in a Straight line It is possible to carry out all the movements either without interruption or one movement gt at a time point to point be pressing the 9 key Before making a move use the up and down arrow keys to select the first destination point position for example P5 Then press 1jJ and the axes will move to the indicated point Once this position is reached the CNC will select the next point for example P6 and it will be ready to move to this new point If the SINGLE mode is selected the CNC will wait for the key to be pressed in order to move the axes to this new position But if the SINGLE mode is not selected the CNC will continue executing the programmed movements until position P12 is reached Atention To execute the movements in a continuous fashion when not all the points are being used it is recommended to define all the unused points with the value corresponding to the withdrawal position of the part Example When using points P1 thru P7 it is recommended to set points P8 thru P12 to the value of point A This example is programmed in diameter P1 X0 ZO P2 X30 Z5 P3 X30 Z20 P4 X60 Z20 P5 X60 Z35 P6 X80 Z45 P7 X90 Z45 45 40 30 15 80701 l Points P8 thru P12 A Points P8 thru P12 X0 Z0 Chapter 6 Section Page PROFILES SEMIAUTOMATIC MODE 3 6 1 3 SPECIAL FEATURES This work mo
243. ontour directly without worrying about tool dimensions since the CNC makes the necessary calculations based on the part contour and on the tool dimensions stored in the tool offset table Every time a tool T2 is selected the CNC automatically applies its corresponding tool length compensation stored in the table X Z I K without having to program any G code There are three G codes for tool radius compensation G40 Cancels tool radius compensation G41 Applies left hand tool radius compensation G42 Applies right hand tool radius compensation X Z Machine parameter P600 1 0 and axes or P600 1 1 and axes e Z G41 G42 The tool stays to the left of the The tool stays to the right of the part in the machining direction part in the machining direction Z es n With P600 1 0 and axes or P600 1 1 and axes G4 acts like a G42 and vice versa xy he The CNC offers atable of up to 32 tools for length L and radius R compensation as well as location codes tool shape F for each tool To set these tool compensation values use the Tool Table option of the Auxiliary function menu Chapter 7 Section Page TOOL COMPENSATION 1 The tool table may also be set via part program using function G50 The maximum values for each tool table field are X Z Tool length 8388 607 mm 330 2599 inches LK Tool length wear 32 766 mm 1 2900 inches R Tool radius 1000 000 mm
244. ool Inspection To select this option press The CNC displays the letter T Key in the tool number whose offset is to be modified and press RECALL The CNC displays the current tool offset values highlighting the I value Example TOI X59 800 Z144 195 F3 R04 10 200 K0 340 I Key in the new value for I and press e The CNC now highlights the K value For example TOI X59 800 Z144 195 F3 R04 10 200 K0 340 102 K Key in the new K value and press ENTER The CNC adds the new values to the previous ones and displays their resulting values For example 10 2 KO0 1 TOI X59 800 Z144 195 F3 R04 10 400 K0 440 To change the offset of another tool press TOOL and repeat the steps described above To quit this option and return to the execution mode press END Page Chapter 3 Section 8 AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS TOOL OFFSET CHANGE 3 5 CYCLE FINISHING PASS AND SAFETY DISTANCE With this option it is possible to define the parameters finishing pass finishing feedrate finishing tool and safety distances along X and Z that will be used in the automatic operations When storing a machining operation as part of a part program the CNC stores these parameters with the values of the machining operation It is possible to access these parameters directly by pressing AUX while in the Automatic Operations mode The parameters are A Finishing pass of the roughing pass F It indicates the p
245. ool entry Chapter 6 Section Page PROFILES AUTOMATIC MODE 11 CYCLE Before starting the programmed operation the CNC positions the tool at a safety distance X Z from the beginning and end points To define the X and Z distances press the AUX key and operate as described in the section on Cycle finishing pass and safety distance of the chapter on Auxiliary function of this manual When storing the Profile as part of a part program the CNC stores as in the other machining operations the following parameters Finishing pass finishing feedrate finishing tool and the safety distances along X and Z together with the values defined by the operation Basic operation With this CNC it 1s possible to execute the profile from beginning to end or one pass at a time by pressing Rn Once the proper data has been entered press 1 for the CNC to execute the profile Before starting to execute the CNC will calculate the actual pass all the passes will be the same and the corresponding finishing pass The machining steps will be the following 1 The spindle will be started at the selected speed and in the indicated turning direction 2 Ifthe cycle execution has been programmed with another tool the CNC will make the tool change by moving to the change position if so required by the machine 3 The tool will be positioned at the beginning point defined by means of the safety distan
246. or Consult with the Technical Service Department This error comes up in the following cases gt A comment has more than 43 characters gt A program has been defined with more than 5 characters gt A block number has more than 4 characters Strange characters in memory Inside temperature limit exceeded Error in Z axis leadscrew error compensation parameters 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 Error in X axis leadscrew error compensation parameters FAGORLAN line error Hardware installed incorrectly FAGORLAN error It comes up in the following instances gt When the configuration of the LAN nodes is incorrect The LAN configuration has been changed One of the nodes is no longer present active When this error occurs access the LAN mode editing or monitoring before executing a program block FAGOR LAN error A node is not ready to work in the LAN For example The PLC64 program is not compiled gt A G52 type block has been sent to an 82CNC while it was in execution FAGOR LAN error An incorrect command has been sent out to a node Watch dog error in the periodic module This error occurs when the periodic module takes longer than 5 milliseconds Watch dog error in the main module This error occurs when the main module takes longer than half the time indicated in machine parameter P729 The internal CNC information requested by activating marks M1901 thru M1949 is
247. pear at the right hand side of the main window The value assigned to the axis feedrate F does not change Page Chapter 3 Section 2 AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS UNITS 3 4 TOOL When selecting this option the CNC allows access to the tool table and it is possible to calibrate tools 3 4 1 TOOL TABLE When selecting this option the CNC shows the values assigned to each offset that is the dimensions of each tool being used to machine the parts Once the tool offset table is selected the operator may move the cursor one line at a time by using the up and down arrow keys Each tool offset has several fields which define the dimensions of the tool These fields are the following Tool length along the X axis It is given in radius and in the units currently selected Its value range is X 8388 607 mm or X 330 2599 inches Tool length along the Z axis It is given in the units currently selected Its value range is Z 8388 607 mm or Z 330 2599 inches Tool radius It is given in the units currently selected Its maximum value is R 1000 000 mm or R 39 3700 inches The CNC will take this R value and the type of tool location code or shape code F when machining the programmed profile In other words the CNC will apply tool compensation in all finishing passes Tool type To indicate the type of tool being used the CNC offers 10 different location codes FO thru F9 This factor depends on the shape
248. plied by 0 0001 Maximum value K99 9999 Multiplied by 99 9999 After G72 all the programmed coordinates will be multiplied by the indicated K value until another scaling factor is programmed or it is canceled To cancel the scaling factor just program another one with a K1 value Itis also canceled when executing an M2 M30 RESET or EMERGENCY o id E wi Chapter 6 Section Page ADDITIONAL PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS SCALING FACTOR G72 7 MPT44 6 6 PROBING G75 By means of this function it is possible to use a touch probe connected to the CNC The programming format is N4 G75 X 4 3 Z 4 3 in millimeters N4 G75 X 3 4 Z 3 4 in inches The axes will move until the probe signal is received Once it is received the CNC will consider that the block has been executed in position and it will assume the current position of the axes at the instant the probe signal was received as their theoretical position The probing feedrate cannot be overridden by the MFO switch and it will be set at 100 of the programmed value If the axes reach the programmed position before the CNC receives the probe signal the CNC will issue error 65 Once this block has been executed the current position values of the axes may be assigned to arithmetic parameters This combined with the possibility to perform mathematic operations with the arithmetic parameters permits editing special tool calibration and part measuring prog
249. point A Max depth of cut per pass radius It must be greater than zero or error 3 will be issued The real step calculated by the CNC will be equal or smaller than the max step Finishing stock allowance along X axis radius It must be greater or equal to zero or error 3 will be issued Finishing stock allowance along Z axis It must be greater or equal to zero or error 3 will be issued Feedrate of the finishing pass If P9 0 there will be no finishing pass but there will be a final roughing pass maintaining the excess material indicated by P7 and P8 Ifithas anegative value neither a final roughing pass nor a finishing pass will be carried out 24 Page Chapter 8 Section MACHINING CANNED CYCLES STOCK ui a ALONG X Z Z NM A Dk GC EN men tee a E HA SE 4 PUES 4 ecc rLd M e 4 AN EE 4 ip Ee UR E Eve eel pe 4 APR AI al A a M y a i v0 4 4 23 NASA ias e r eem pint Last roughing pass i Finishing pass P10 This parameter must be assigned a value other than 0 in order for the CNC to carry out a final roughing pass prior to the finishing pass P9 gt 0 P10 0 P9 gt 0 P1040 4 Finishing pass__ YY Last roughing pass YZjy _____ 77 Finishing pass P13 Number of the first block to define the pattern P14 Numberofthelastblockto define the pattern It must be greater than P13 Otherwise error 13 is generated Chapt
250. pressed the selected line will reutrn to its previous number if it had one To quit the part program table position the cursor over EXIT and press ENTER Chapter 7 Section Page WORKING WITH PART PROGRAMS ACCESS TO THE 1 PART PROGRAM TABLE 7 2 PART PROGRAM SELECTION To analyze the contents of a part program in order to edit it or modify it select it at the part program table and press RECALL Each part may consist of up to 20 basic operations However the upper right hand side of the screen will show a set of 7 operations Whenever a part program is accessed the cursor appears PART 01346 at its first free position IATORNINS The free positions are indicated by means of the 2 FACING character and the occupied positions indicate the type 3 of operation that has been edited in them Although the profiles are treated as a single operations they occupy THREADING two positions 4 Q Se Each one of these operations will have been previously edited by the operator in the AUTOMATIC mode CYCLE and in the manner described in the chapter about AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS To select one of these operations position the cursor over it by using the keys To quit the part program option position the cursor over EXIT and press ENTER To return to the part program directory previous menu press the up arrow key until the cursor is positioned over PART 01346 and then press the e key
251. program electronic threading How to apply the scaling factor How to work with a probe How to program the single block treatment Chapter 7 Tool compensation It shows how to program tool radius and length compensation Chapter 8 Machining canned cycles It shows how to program the different machining canned cycles Introduction 7 Chapter 9 Subroutines Special user program for subroutines P99994 It shows how to identify a standard and a parametric subroutine How to program a call to a standard or to a parametric subroutine It shows the subroutine nesting levels Chapter 10 Parametric programming Itshowshow touse parametric programming assignments operators jump functions etc Programming Example Error codes Introduction 8 I e PROGRAM WRITING A CNC program consists of a series of blocks or instructions These blocks or instructions consist of words formed by capital letters signs and numbers The signs and numbers for this CNC are 0123456789 It is possible to program without a number when the value is zero and without the sign when it is positive When programming the numbers of a word may be replaced with an arithmetic parameter Later on during basic execution the CNC will replace the arithmetic parameter with its value For example If XP3 has been programmed the CNC will replace P3 with its numeric value when executing this instruction obtaining a result such as X20 X20 567 X 0 003 etc
252. programming the block N10 Z5000 since the programmed move will be 25000 Z 5000 10000 mm In order to make this move without issuing this error it must be carried out in two stages as indicated below N10 ZO 5000 mm move N10 Z5000 5000 mm move S or F value too large Not enough information for corner rounding chamfering or compensation Repeated subroutine Function M19 programmed incorrectly Function G72 programmed incorrectly It must be borne in mind that if G72 is applied only to one axis this axis must be positioned at part zero 0 value at the time the scaling factor is applied This error occurs in the following cases gt More than 15 nesting levels when calling subroutines gt A block has been programmed which contains a jump to itself Example N120 G25 N120 The programmed arc does not go through the defined end point tolerance 0 01mm or there is no arc that goes through the points defined by G08 or G09 041 This error is issued when programming a tangential entry as in the following cases gt There is no room to perform the tangential entry A clearance of twice the rounding radius or greater is required gt If the tangential entry is to be applied to an arc G02 G03 The tangential entry must be defined in a linear block 042 This error is issued when programming a tangential exit as in the following cases gt There is no room to perform the tangential exit A clearance of twice the rou
253. put O26 the CNC assumes the feedrate set by machine parameter P812 Handwheel managed by the PLC Machine parameter P623 3 indicates whether the axes movements with handwheels are affected by Feed Hold 21 or not 0 Machine parameter P622 1 indicates whether the multiplying factor indicated by the MFO switch position is applied 0 or the one indicated by the PLC outputs 044 and 045 1 already available Spindle control from the PLC This feature is available when P619 7 1 Output O27 1 tells the CNC to apply the spindle analog voltage set by the PLC The value of this analog signal is set at register R156 and sent to the CNC by mark M1956 R156 0000 1111 1111 1111 gt 10V R156 0001 1111 1111 1111 gt 10V R156 0000 0111 1111 1111 224 5V R156 0001 0111 1111 1111 gt 5V R156 0000 0011 1111 1111 gt 2 5V R156 0001 0011 1111 1111 gt 2 5V R156 0000 0000 0000 0000 gt OV R156 0001 0000 0000 0000 gt OV Also PLC output 043 lets you control the rotation of the spindle Already available It must be normally low If it is brought up the CNC stops the spindle When it is brought back up the CNC restarts the spindle Information for the PLC on the status of the machine reference home search I88 Home search in progress I100 Xaxis home search done I101 Zaxis home search done 10 L Additional CNC information for the PLC R120 The Lower half of t
254. r keying in the new value press ENTER 4 3 1 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED LIMIT When working at constant surface speed it may be interesting to limit the spindle speed rpm To do this the CNC shows the MAX value corresponding to the maximum speed the spindle may reach To set this speed press S Key in the value and press ENTER The entered value will appear to the right of MAX and from then on the spindle speed rpm will be limited to this value Chapter 4 Section Page SPINDLE CONSTANT SURFACE 3 SPEED 44 SPINDLE SPEED RANGE CHANGE With this CNC the machine can have a gear box in order to adapt the speeds and torques of the spindle motor to the various machining requirements When the new spindle speed S requires a range change the CNC will act as follows fthemachine has an automatic range changer the CNC will select the corresponding range Whenthe machine does not have an automatic range changer the CNC interrupts the execution of the program and indicates to the operator which range corresponds to the selected S speed so he can change it 4 4 1 MANUAL SPINDLE RANGE CHANGE When not having an automatic range changer and the new selected spindle speed S requires a range change the CNC acts as follows 1 Once the need for a range change has been detected the CNC will show at the last line of the editing window the range to be selected 2 After making the range chan
255. rams Function G75 implies functions G01 and G40 which means that once G75 is executed the CNC assumes G01 linear interpolation and G40 cancelation of tool radius compensation Page Chapter 6 Section 8 ADDITIONAL PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS PROBING G75 6 7 SINGLE BLOCK TREATMENT ON G47 OFF G48 This CNC considers a single block the section of a program contained between a G47 and a G48 After executing function G47 the CNC executes all the following blocks in a row until a G48 is detected When pressing the key while executing a Single Block block eitherin Automatic or block by block the CNC goes on executing all the following blocks until a G48 is executed While function G47 is active the Manual Feedrate Override switch as well as the spindle speed override keys are ignored thus that section of the program is executed at 10096 of the programmed F and S Functions G47 and G48 are modal and incompatible with each other On CNC power up after executing an M02 M30 after an EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC assumes G48 Chapter 6 Section Page ADDITIONAL PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS A CET S 9 e TOOL COMPENSATION Usually machining operations demand the calculation of the actual tool path taking its length and radius dimensions into account so the part ends up with the desired dimensions Using tool length and radius compensation makes it possible to program the part c
256. ransfer programs from and to one another This communication may be managed either from the CNC when in the Peripheral mode or from the computer by means of FAGOR s DNC protocol in which case the CNC may be in any of its operating mode 3 8 1 PERIPHERAL MODE In this mode the CNC may communicate with the FAGOR Floppy Disk Unit with a general peripheral device or with a computer having a standard off the shelf communications program To access this mode press AUX and after selecting the Auxiliary modes press the key corresponding to the Peripherals option Once this option is selected the upper left hand side of the CNC screen will show the following menu RECEIVE FROM Fagor FLOPPY DISK UNIT SEND TO Fagor FLOPPY DISK UNIT RECEIVE FROM GENERAL DEVICE SEND TO GENERAL DEVICE Fagor FLOPPY DISK UNIT DIRECTORY Fagor DELETE FLOPPY DISK UNIT PROGRAM DNC ON OFF eU RUP O Go03 gdJGJ eOP I In order to use any of these options the DNC mode must be inactive If it is active the upper right hand side of the screen shows DNC press 6 DNC ON OFF to deactivate it the DNC letters disappear With options 0 1 2 and 3 it is possible to transfer machine parameters the decoded M function table and the leadscrew error compensation table to a peripheral device The lower right hand side of the CNC screen will show a directory of up to 7 part programs of the 10 that may be stored To see the rest of them use To
257. ration being interrupted and press 2 MODIFICATIONS ON THE OPERATION WITH A MASTER HANDWHEEL The operation with the master handwheel is now as follows a When the machine is stopped Only the first handwheel is enabled the second one master does not work Therefore only the X axis can be jogged with a handwheel b When the machine is running CNC in Execution Only the Master handwheel is enabled the first handwheel does not work The axes start moving when turning the Master Handwheel The feedrate of the axes depend on the turning speed of the Master Handwheel When the handwheel stops the machine also stops When the Master Handwheel is turned in the opposite direction the CNC also reverses the moving direction Retrace Function of a single block c Semiautomatic Rounding Operation The Semiautomatic Rounding operation starts when turning the Master Handwheel When stopping the Master Handwheel the execution is interrupted When turning the Master handwheel again execution is resumed The turning direction of the handwheel cannot be changed When the operation is over the CNC ignores the turning of the Master Handwheel for 1 4 seconds Thus preventing another operation from being started After this time when the Master Handwheel is turned the CNC starts executing a new operation in the indicated direction d Semiautomatic Taper Turning Operation The Semiautomatic Taper Turning Operation starts when turning the
258. rev F19 685 19 685inch rev The maximum actual feedrate of the machine may be limited by a lower value see the instruction manual of the machine The maximum machining value may be programmed directly by using the FO code Example On a machine whose maximum programmable feedrate is 10 000 mm min it may be programmed as F10000 or FO The programmed F value becomes effective when performing a linear interpolation G01 or a circular one G02 G03 When the F function is not programmed the CNC will assume FO When positioning in rapid GOO the axes will move at its maximum speed regardless of the programmed F value This maximum rapid positioning feedrate is set for each axis during machine set up and its maximum value cannot exceed 65 535m min or 2580 inches min see the instruction manual of the machine The programmed feedrate may be varied either between 0 and 120 or between 0 and 100 depending on the setting of machine parameter P600 3 by means of the Feedrate Override Switch on the operator panel of the CNC as long as neither a threading operation G33 G86 G87 nor a probing movement is taking place G57 Chapter 4 Section Page ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS FEEDRATE P iN 1 4 1 1 FEEDRATE F IN mm min or tenths of an inch min G94 From the moment G94 is programmed the CNC assumes the programmed feedrate values F4 to be in mm min or O linch min units F10 1 inch min Function G94 is
259. rk cycle see drawing are carried out as follows At the programmed feedrate from point 1 to point 2 and from 2 to 3 butin rapid from point 0 to point 1 and from 3 to 0 The exit conditions of the cycle are GOO and G90 If the position of the tool is not correct to execute the cycle error 4 will be issued If itis correct a previous vertical facing will be carried out if necessary If there is a finishing pass the cycle will be completed on the tool s starting position 0 If there is no finishing pass the cycle will end at point F If the last movement prior to calling the canned cycle G82 has been executed in G00 tool radius compensation G41 G42 can be used Otherwise error 35 will be issued Chapter 8 Section Page MACHINING CANNED CYCLES FACING WITH STRAIGHT 35 SECTIONS G82 8 15 TURNING CANNED CYCLE WITH CURVED SECTIONS G84 P0 P1 P2 P3 P5 P7 P8 P9 G i 3 Pia ms i P18CD MPT83 P1904 Format N4 G84 P0 K P1 K P2 K P3 K P5 K P7 K P8 K P9 K P18 K P19 K Parameter meaning X coordinate value of point A radius or diameter Z coordinate value of point A X coordinate value of point B radius or diameter Z coordinate value of point B Max step It must be greater than zero or error 3 will be issued The real step calculated by the CNC will be smaller than or equal to the max step Finishing s
260. rning at 2000 rpm The drilling feedrate is Imm min with 5mm pecks in order to remove the drilled out material F0001 000 100 RPM 2000 100 TOS BEGIN Z 0000 000 END Z 0020 000 P 0005 00 Safety distance Z 3 000 Safety distance X 10 000 Tapping The hole in the previous example is to be tapped at a feedrate of Imm mm with the spindle turning at 1000 rpm The tapping tool is TO6 F0001 000 100 RPM 1000 100 T06 BEGIN Z 0000 000 END Z 0020 000 P 0 Safety distance Z 3 000 Safety distance X 10 000 Chapter 5 Section SIMPLE DRILLING AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS TAPPING Page 41 5 9 MULTIPLE DRILLING With this operation it is possible to drill concentric holes on the face of the part along the Z axis as well as on its cylindric side along the X axis To access this operation proceed as follows Press select option 6 Other cycles and then Multiple Drilling When in DRO mode press or LEVEL and select the Multiple Drilling option Once the new cycle has been selected The CNC will display the following data The CNC shows this cycle when having spindle orientation and live tool Once selected the CNC will show the following type of information F 1000 100 TRPM 1500 100 T3 Machining feedrate m min Percentage of Feedrate Override Live tool RPM Live tool speed override if P609 8 1 Drilling tool X 20 X20 enof 20 prow 0 X 30 E ENE T X 20
261. ro or error 3 will be issued Finishing stock allowance along the Z axis It must be greater or equal to zero or error 3 will be issued Feedrate of the finishing pass If it is zero there will be no finishing pass If itis negative error 3 will be issued Programming example in diameter Starting point 0 X136 Z39 Profile points A X90 Z 45 and B X0 Z0 N90 GOO X 136 2530 iiir sen aires eate beau inia Tool positioning at point 0 N100 G82 PO K90 P1 K 45 P2 K0 P3 K0 P5 K5 P7 K3 P8 K4 P9 K100 Page Chapter 8 Section FACING WITH STRAIGHT 34 MACHINING CANNED CYCLES SECTIONS G82 When programming this canned cycle the following points must be borne in mind l The distance between the starting point 0 and final point B along the Z axis must be equal or greater than P8 To avoid passes that are too thin or generating error 31 when operting with tool compensation the value of this distance from 0 to B should be equal to P8 NP5 N being an entire number The distance from 0 to A along the X axis should be higher than P7 The machining conditions feedrate spindle rotation etc must be programmed before calling the cycle The parameters can be programmed in the calling block or in previous blocks This canned cycle does not alter the call parameters which may be used in later cycles However it does modify the values of parameters P70 through P99 The movements of the elementary wo
262. rpolation with absolute center coordinates Square corner Arc tangent to previous path Arc defined by three points Call to a standard subroutine Call to a parametric subroutine Identification of a standard subroutine Identification of a parametric subroutine End of subroutine Unconditional jump call Jump Call if equal to 0 Jump Call if not equal to 0 Jump Call if smaller than Jump Call if equal to or greater than Display error code Store coordinate origin Recover coordinate origin previously stored with G31 Threadcutting Automatic radius blend Tangential entry Tangential exit Chamfer Cancelation of tool radius compensation Left hand tool radius compensation Right hand tool radius compensation Single Block treatment ON Single Block treatment OFF Programmable feedrate override 96 Load tool dimensions into tool offset table Page Chapter 1 Section PREPARATORY 4 PROGRAM WRITING FUNCTIONS G Function Meaning Section G51 Correct tool dimensions G53 G59 Zero offsets G66 Pattern repeat roughing canned cycle following part s shape G67 NO Turning canned cycle G67 NI Facing canned cycle G67 N2 Taper turning canned cycle G67 N3 Threading canned cycle G67 N4 Rounding canned cycle G67 N5 Grooving canned cycle G67 N6 Simple drilling canned
263. ru 120 of the set feedrate Follow these steps to set the axis feedrate F Press F Enter the value via keyboard and press ENTER When working in mm min this value must be between 0 and 9999 mm min When working in inches min this value must be between 0 and 393 inches min When working in mm rev this value must be between 0 and 500 000 mm rev When working in inches rev this value must be between 0 and 19 685 inches rev The CNC assumes this value and it displays it on the screen It also displays the percentage of the feedrate override currently selected by the FEED switch For example F1200 100 Atention When the CNC displays a value of F0000 it applies the maximum feedrate set by machine parameter for each axis Chapter 2 Section Page BASIC OPERATIONS FEEDRATE SETTING 1 2 2 WORK TOOL SELECTION Regardless of whether the machine has an automatic tool changer or not the CNC must know at all times which tool is being used for the machining operation The machine has an automatic tool changer To select a new tool T follow these steps Press TOOL Key in the number to the tool to be selected and press The CNC will manage the tool change and it will assume all the offset values corresponding to the new selected tool These offset values tool lengths and radius will be taken into account by the CNC when performing any operation from this moment on The m
264. ruptions or a pass at a time by pressing r3 Once the proper data has been entered press so the CNC executes the turning operation Before starting to execute the part the CNC will calculate the real pass to be used along the X axis all the passes will be identical and the corresponding finishing pass The machining steps will be the following 1 The spindle will start at the selected speed and turning direction 2 Ifthe cycle has been programmed to be executed with another tool the CNC will perform a tool change moving the axes to the tool change position if so required by the machine 3 The tool will approach the Begin point keeping the selected safety distance from it along the X and Z axes X 4 Every roughing pass is performed as indicated in the illustration starting from point 1 going through points 2 3 and 4 and ending at point 5 5 Once the roughing operation has concluded the CNC runs the finishing pass as indicated below and the turning operation will end at the cycle calling point XA gt Z Page Chapter 5 Section 10 AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS TURNING The feedrate for the finishing pass is defined by the of the current programmed feedrate If the cycle does not have a finishing pass the tool will move to the cycle calling point after running the last roughing pass 6 The CNC stops the spindle Considerations When the surface to be machined is not comp
265. s a part program select the desired one in the part program directory and place the cursor on its header PART 01435 A listing of the operations it consists of must appear Press the keystroke sequence AUX 7 The CNC will show the graphic simulation screen 1 Press The CNC starts simulating the part and generating its ISO coded program 99996 When done with the simulation program 99996 stored in CNC memory will contain all simulated blocks in ISO code Generating the ISO program 99996 at a PC Usually the 99996 program generated from a part program exceeds the available memory space of the CNC By using DNC30 this program may be generated at a PC To do this proceed as follows Activate DNC communications and execute the DNC30 program at the PC Selectatthe PC the menu option Program Management Receive Digitizing Atthe CNC select the operation or place the cursor on the part program header PART 01435 A listing of the operations it consists of must appear Press AUX 8 The CNC will display the graphic simulation screen Press Ty The CNC starts simulating the part and generating program 99996 When done with the simulation the 99996 program generated at the PC will contain all the blocks simulated by the CNC in ISO code This program can be executed at the CNC through the menu option Execute infinite program of the DNC30 4 MACHINE SAFETY REGULATION Th
266. s from exiting or entering this zone while jogging them with either the jog keys or the electronic handwheel The operator might suspect a malfunction since the CNC does not issue any message From this version on in these cases the CNC will behave as follows When the zone has been set as a Work Zone the CNC will set PLCI input 146 high when trying to exit the selected zone When the zone has been set as a Work Zone the CNC will set PLCI input I46 high when trying to enter the selected zone 2 RESUME EXECUTION AT MID PROGRAM If while a part the program is interrupted due to a power failure etc itis now possible to resume execution from the interrupted program on This way there is no longer need to repeat the whole program thus saving considerable amount of time To resume program execution follow these steps Ist Select the DRO mode the one appearing on CNC power up after the General Test Passed In this mode no cycle appears selected 2nd Press RECALL to open the part programs window 3rd Select the part that was running Use the up and down arrow keys to position over the desired part program and press RECALL The CNC will executed the selected operation and it will resume the part program running it to the end Version 6 1 January 1997 1 NEW LANGUAGES Taiwanese and Portuguese Machine parameter P99 P99 5 Portuguese P99 6 Taiwanese 4th Use the up and down arrow keys to select the ope
267. s shown below PS Sets the threading pitch P P28 determines the spindle turning direction for right hand or left hand threads P11 Indicates the type of thread P11 0 for outside thread and P11 1 for inside P14 Sets the depth of the thread H It must havea positive radius value If programmed with a 0 value the CNC will issue the corresponding error Page Chapter 8 Section 8 MACHINING CANNED CYCLES THREADCUTITING G67 N3 P16 Defines the penetration angle of the tool with respect to the X axis ee a 0 a y 1 Y l l SY If equal to 0 the thread penetration will be radial If equal to half the tool angle the tool will penetrate following the flank of the thread S S A P19 Safety distance along the X axis in radius P20 Safety distance along the Z axis P128 Thread exit distance It sets the distance from the end of the thread when it starts leaving it It does so making a taper thread maintaining a Z pitch equal to P10 If P128 KO there is no thread exit If P128 is negative the CNC issues error 3 General concepts 1 The machining conditions feedrate spindle speed etc must be programmed before calling the cycle 2 These parameters must be programmed in the block before the one calling the cycle N2 F10 1000 M03 N4 P100 K P101 K P102 K P103 K P4 K P8 K P11 K P14 K P16 K N6 G67 N3 3 The canned cycle does not alter the call parameters P22 P23 and P26 which may be u
268. sation the value of this distance from 0 to B should be equal to P8 NP5 N being an entire number any multiple of P5 The distance from 0 to A along The axis should be higher than P7 The definition ofthe pattern must not include point A because itis identified by PO and P1 The machining conditions feedrate spindle rotation etc must be programmed before calling the cycle The parameters can be programmed in the calling block or in previous blocks This canned cycle does not alter the call parameters which may be used in later cycles However it does modify the values of parameters P70 through P99 The movements ofthe elementary work cycle see drawing are carried out as follows At the programmed feedrate from point 1 to point 2 and from 2 to 3 butin rapid from point 0 to point 1 and from 3 to 0 The exit conditions are G00 and G90 The pattern can be made up of straight lines and arcs All the blocks of pattern definition will be programmed with cartesian coordinates being mandatory to program the two axes in absolute otherwise the CRT will display error 21 If arcs are included in the definition they must be programmed with the center s LK coordinates referred to the arc s starting point and with the relevant sign If functions F S T or M are programmed in the definition they will be ignored except for the finishing pass No polar definitions can be programmed The cycle is completed on the starting
269. sed in later cycles However it does modify the values of the basic parameters defining the cycle 4 The basic operation is described in detail in the Operating manual 5 The exit conditions are GOO and G90 Chapter 8 Section Page MACHINING CANNED CYCLES THREADCUTTING 9 G67 N3 8 5 ROUNDING CANNED CYCLE G67 N4 XA END pas BEGIN Basic parameters defining a cycle P16 Type of cycle END END XXX gt 294949945 wo Meteo eto SRD 90906060 SSS SSS SN RA ORO LSLS BEGIN 9090905 90909090905 9090901 tete ette P1620 XXXq P16 SN 90909094 909090909090 o SY Z555 SRR 9830909000909090 KS Ke 4 RSLS RS boo boo 9 KS LIDIA XS IO P100 X coordinate of the BEGIN point in the selected units in radius or diameter P101 Z coordinate of the BEGIN point P102 X coordinate of the END point in the selected units in radius or diameter P103 Z coordinate of the END point P4 Rounding pass D It must have a positive radius value If programmed with a 0 value the CNC will assume parameter P5 number of rounding passes If both P4 and P5 are equal to 0 the CNC will issue the corresponding message P9 Defines the rounding radius R P10 Indicates the quadrant to be machined Together with P15 and P18 sets the type of corner P15 Type of corner P1520 for convex rounding and P15 1 for concave rounding P1
270. so stop If the Master Handwheel is turned in the opposite direction the axes also invert their moving direction Return Function for one block only c The Jog with Master Handwheel feature may be used with any type of execution be it a cycle an ISO coded program a Chamfer etc Usually with the CNC in execution the first handwheel is disabled except for the semi automatic mode of the automatic operations Taper Turning and Rounding On both Semi automatic operations the Master Handwheel controls the feedrate of the tool path and the First Handwheel will move the X axis Jog with Master Handwheel feature disabled P622 6 1 O39 0 When this feature is disabled PLC output O39 is setto 0 and the handwheels operate like until now as on previous versions 2 DYNAMIC GRAPHICS WHILE IN EXECUTION Until now with the 800T CNC a part program could be simulated verified graphically before running it From now on it is also possible to display dynamic graphics of the machining path while in execution Requirements This application requires a 800TG or 800TGI CNC model G for graphics Operation When running an Automatic Operation a Part program the ISO coded program in Automatic or Single Block mode itis now possible to display the machining path dynamically in the execution stage To do this once the execution has started the following keys may be pressed 4 The CNC displays the graphics scree
271. sseseivosuesersesuacetoosecs 4 4 3 Tool ncs OA ii eats 3 4 3 1 Load tool dimensions into tool table G50 Liu ecco secet tret re rebar cte tube ented 8 4 3 2 COMECIOS PII d scia 9 4 4 Miscellaneoms functions Mii 10 NENNEN Chapter 5 PATH CONTROL 51 Ropero ap d Hosius cesar MOX Reese pete UEM RERUM Ds eeeu Ei pent Meares 1 2 2 Spare Crne r GU IN b E 1 33 Rapi posifonme TOUY e 2 5 4 Linear miter plein COO E aisi cte ori bra Ebr er SEU elabora qe telae ala Mei qe t Vend a ici 3 33 Circular mtempolanon TUS GOIN asics juss aces RD anes anna assy A AEDA N ado ERACE MEAS Vp dE 4 Sad Circular interpolation by programming the arc radius eene eie tet eterne ttes 3 354 Circular interpolation with absolute center coordinates eese 6 ON acsi up P oe iji EN RM EE 6 5 6 Ave tangent to previous path OS e iii 7 5 7 Are denned by theg pomis USD 8 5 8 Tangential EYA T 9 5 9 Vue REALE a Uam 10 5 10 Automate radiis plend TOES ii o Ee pt HORIS Lore MOL ERE o ER IERES 11 5 11 CRONE Meera eon e rbd dnm d NIME DN Du Ene geb E Mq Mee 13 HaT Chapter 6 ADDITIONAL PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS 6 1 Dae CORE Gu ouis avis EE Ho vate sate DEMAIN baa n AE Me epp aes 1 6 2 Display amor code TOU ose eden d vede Shee en at en cn ern ROS 1 6 3 Usgasdibinsal prop call MO A 3 6 4 Ble Cine merda sia EH EDU ERU ER LUNO 4 6 4 1 jc nr mener TU 3 6 5 Scaling wr uot fra oni A a 6 6 A P 8 6 7 Single block treatm
272. ssign a 5 digit number to the part program Save part programs out to a peripheral Automatic operation Slot milling Delay before opening the positioning loop Special modes accessing password Handwheel inactive when Feedrate Override Switch out of handwheel positions AFFECTED MANUAL AND SECTION Operating Manual Operating Manual Operating Manual Installation Manual Installation Manual Installation Manual Chapter 7 Section 7 7 Section 5 10 Section 4 3 2 Section 3 7 Section 4 3 2 Date July 1994 Software Version 4 1 and newer FEATURE Linear and Bell shaped spindle acc dec Profile with without corner rounding Threading operation also with thread exit Rapid jog at 20096 or depending on the position of the Feedrate Override Switch Tool inspection Execution of program 99996 AFFECTED MANUAL AND SECTION Installation Manual Operating Manual Operating Manual Installation Manual Operating Manual Installation Manual Operating Manual Operating Manual Installation Manual Operating Manual Section 5 8 Section 6 2 Section 5 6 2 Section 4 3 3 Section 2 3 1 Section 3 4 3 Section 3 4 3 Section 5 1 3 Section 3 11 Section 3 10 Date January 1995 Software version 5 1 and newer FEATURE M3 M44 confirmation by detecting feedback reversal JOG movements also in mm rev Handwheel governed by the PLCI Spindle inhibit from PLCI Clear all
273. subject to variations due to technical modifications FAGOR AUTOMATION S Coop Ltda reserves the right to modify the contents of the manual without prior notice INDEX Section Page Comparison Table for FAGOR 300T CNCE models eee erre tete eese ix New Teatures And modifications euis eise pia ast URN A DA EBEN MUERE xiii INTRODUCTION Sariy P nnno me 3 Matetlal RECTAS DEIS o an 5 Fagor Documentation Tor ihe SOOM CNG sonia 6 Manus COS A Ea M per PM M rSGE 7 Law Chapter 1 CONCEPTS 1 1 CET SS 1 1 2 We Pel dBSCD BIROU crono 3 1 2 1 Keys tor ampie A PETA TINS ui 3 Lb Special keysitoke Seque ES us Lecce ici 6 12 3 cindy i d ee on ene la 7 L3 Display units LNHERCDIER dad 8 1 31 AX ARIS display units Crude diameter 50 1 eno Hooded sckqp Lue Redes nia 8 1 4 qais v Rorr rl Mem 9 1 4 1 Tome d cc o MM T in g 1 4 2 DO a A N E E E E E 10 1 4 3 Coordinate PES 10 1 5 Operghou J0 wieceemental Od uui oce cepe pc 11 a Chapter 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 241 Asis TRUE i M 0j am ns 1 zx bo DN SE Lo a MEE o 2 241 Ec o rre E 3 ied t Mr O 4 Zial Mioan sn MD pee TT 4 PUN RS rco cni NC oT in 3 22 Axes jus via electam Bari wbisel aiii 6 2 4 Beginning point BEGIN and end point END isses erase pnet ont une tne z 2 4 1 Bonn and End pomt SEI sarearen E A 8 2 4 2 Posricang at Begim or End DONIS amparan 9 2 Activating deachvating extemal dEVICBS ssl 10 Section Page MU cantor 3 AUXILIARY FUONCTIONS O SoS Chapter 3 AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS USO
274. t Too many nesting levels More than one spindle range have been defined in the same block This error will be issued in the following cases gt There is no block at the address defined by the parameter assigned to F18 F19 F20 F21 F22 gt The corresponding axis has not been defined in the addressed block An axis is repeated when programming G74 K has not been programmed after G04 Error in a definition block or subroutine call or when defining either conditional or unconditional jumps This error is issued in the following cases gt Memory overflow gt Not enough free tape or CNC memory to store the part program I K has not been defined for a circular interpolation or thread 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 An attempt has been made to select a tool offset at the tool table or a non existent external tool the number of tools is set by machine parameter Too large a value assigned to a function This error is often issued when programming an F value in mm min inch min and then switching to work in mm rev inch rev without changing the F value The programmed G function does not exist Tool radius value too large Tool radius value too large 4 7 E d V T T Ta A A movement of over 8388 mm or 330 26 inches has been programmed Example Being the Z axis position Z 5000 if we want to move it to point Z5000 the CNC will issue error 33 when
275. t followed the CNC will maintain the previous work mode The spindle speed value remains active until either anew one is preset RESET is pressed or the CNC is turned off Chapter 4 Section Page SPINDLE OPERATING MODE 1 SELECTION 42 SPINDLE IN REVOLUTIONS PER MINUTE RPM Once this work mode has been selected the CNC shows the following type of information Where the selected RPM are indicated followed by the percentage of spindle speed override being applied F 0100 000 100 RPM1500 100 T2 If the CNC does not display this information line it means that it is not in this mode To access it press CSS To select another spindle speed press S and after keying in the desired value press the A value between SO and 9999 rev min may be programmed however the maximum programmable speed is set by the OEM consult the instruction book of the machine The CNC will apply this value whenever a value equal to or greater than this one is programmed Once the new speed has been selected the CNC will act as follows When the spindle is turning the CNC will output the analog voltage corresponding to the new selected spindle speed If the new rpm correspond to another range the CNC will either generate or request a range change before outputting the corresponding analog voltage for the new selected speed When the spindle is stopped the CNC will store the new selected value in or
276. t of dwell time is indicated by the letter K Example G04 K0 05 gt 0 05 second dwell G04 K2 5 gt 2 5 second dwell When K is followed by a figure it can be a value between 0 and 99 99 seconds whereas when followed by an arithmetic parameter KP3 this parameter value may be between 0 and 655 35 seconds The dwell is executed at the beginning of the block containing it G04 may also be programmed as G4 6 2 DISPLAY ERROR CODE G30 As soon as the CNC reads a block containing the G30 code interrupts the running program and displays the indicated error Programming format N4 G30 K2 N4 Block number G30 Error programming code K2 0 99 Error code number to be displayed The error code may also be programmed by an arithmetic parameter between PO and P255 For example N4 G30 KP123 This code in combination with G26 G27 G28 and G29 permits interrupting the program and detecting possible measuring errors etc A block containing G30 cannot have any other information Atention When wishing the CNC s own error code comments NOT to appear on the screen the error code number to be displayed by G30 must be greater than those used by the CNC Remember that the operator may write comments in the program and the CNC will display them when executing the corresponding block Chapter 6 Section Page ADDITIONAL PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS DWELL G04 1 6 3 UNCONDITIONAL JUMP CALL G
277. t part zero 0 value at the time the scaling factor is applied This error occurs in the following cases gt More than 15 nesting levels when calling subroutines gt A block has been programmed which contains a jump to itself Example N120 G25 N120 The programmed arc does not go through the defined end point tolerance 0 01mm or there is no arc that goes through the points defined by G08 or G09 041 This error is issued when programming a tangential entry as in the following cases gt There is no room to perform the tangential entry A clearance of twice the rounding radius or greater is required gt If the tangential entry is to be applied to an arc G02 G03 The tangential entry must be defined in a linear block 042 This error is issued when programming a tangential exit as in the following cases gt There is no room to perform the tangential exit A clearance of twice the rounding radius or greater is required i gt If the tangential exit is to be applied to an arc G02 G03 The tangential exit must be defined in a linear block 043 Polar origin coordinates G93 defined incorrectly 044 Function M45 S programmed wrong speed of the live tool 045 Function G36 G37 G38 or G39 programmed incorrectly 046 Polar coordinates defined incorrectly 047 A zero movement has been programmed during radius compensation or corner rounding 048 Start or cancel tool radius compensation while in G02 or G03 049 Chamf
278. t to other values throughout the program Chapter 9 Section Page PARAMETRIC SUBROUTINE SUBROUTINES G21 G23 3 9 6 NESTING LEVELS Itis possible to call upon a subroutine from the main program or from another subroutine standard or parametric and upon another one from this one and so on upto 15 levels Each one of these levels may be repeated 255 times Subroutine nesting diagram Main program Subroutine 1 Subroutine 2 Subroutine 3 NO G 22 Nl 22 Ne G 22 N3 Geo N11 Geo N2 1 G20 N31 G 24 G 24 G 24 MPM103 M02 or M03 Page Chapter 9 Section 4 SUBROUTINES NESTING LEVELS I 0 PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING This CNC offers 255 arithmetic parameters PO through P254 which can be used to edit parametric blocks and perform math operations and jumps within a program These parametric blocks may be written anywhere in the program The various operations to be performed with these parameters are Fl Addition F2 Subtraction F3 Multiplication F4 Division F5 Square root F6 Square root of the sum of squares Pythagorean formula F7 Sine ES Cosine F9 Tangent FIO Arc tangent F11 Comparison F12 Entire part integer without decimals F13 Entire part plus one Fl4 Entire part minus one F15 Absolute value without sign Fl6 Complement invert sign F17 Memory address location of the indicated block F18 X coordinate contained in the block located at the indicated address F19
279. ted to the machine builder or person in charge of installing and starting up the CNC It has the Installation manual inside Sometimes it may contain an additional manual describing New Software Features recently implemented Is directed to the end user or CNC operator It contains 2 manuals Operating Manual describing how to operate the CNC Programming Manual describing how to program the CNC Sometimes it may contain an additional manual describing New Software Features recently implemented Is directed to people using the optional DNC communications software Is directed to people wishing to design their own DNC communications software to communicate with the 800 without using the DNC25 30 software To be used when the CNC has an integrated PLC Is directed to the machine builder or person in charge of installing and starting up the PLCI Is directed to people using the optional communications software DNC PLC Is directed to people using the Fagor Floppy Disk Unit and it shows how to use it MANUAL CONTENTS The operation manual consists of the following sections Index Comparative Table for Fagor 800T CNC models New Features and modifications Introduction Safety Conditions Material returning conditions Additional remarks Fagor documents for the 800T CNC Manual Contents Chapter 1 Concepts Indicates the layout of the keyboard operator panel and information on the monitor Describes the display units and how to
280. the CNC shows that its position is 423 5 mm the scale offset will be Machine parameter P908 423 5 230 193 5 mm After setting the machine parameter with this value press the RESET key so that value is assumed by the CNC A new home search must be carried out for the proper values to be assumed for that axis From this version on the penetration of each pass will depend on the sign assigned to parameter D When D positive the penetration of each pass depends on the corresponding pass D n With D negative the penetration passes remain constant with the absolute value of parameter D GENERATING AN ISO CODED PROGRAM With this CNC the ISO code low level for an operation or a part program may be generated To use this feature machine parameter P623 2 must be set to 1 This ISO program always has the number 99996 and can be stored either at the CNC or at a PC Program 99996 is a special user program in ISO code and can be Generated from an operation or a part program Edited at the CNC itself via menu option Auxiliary Modes Edit program 99996 Loaded into the CNC after being generated at a PC Generating the ISO program 99996 at the CNC This CNC has 7 K of memory space to store program 99996 If the generated program is larger than that the CNC will issue the relevant error message To generate program 99996 proceed as follows Tf it is an operation select or define the desired operation Tfiti
281. the CNC will issue the corresponding message Final diameter f to be obtained in the grooving operation Indicates the tool width TW Sets the time the cutter will remain at the bottom of each grooving pass Itis given in seconds Therefore P132K 1 5 means 1 5 seconds Safety distance along the X axis in radius Safety distance along the Z axis Parameters related to the finishing pass If no finishing pass is desired set P22 KO and P23 KO P22 Percentage of programmed roughing pass used as finishing pass P23 Percentage of programmed roughing feedrate used as finishing feedrate Page Chapter 8 Section GROOVING 12 MACHINING CANNED CYCLES G67 N5 General concepts 1 2 The machining conditions feedrate spindle speed etc must be programmed before calling the cycle These parameters must be programmed in the block before the one calling the cycle N2 F10 S1000 M03 N4 P100 K P101 K P102 K P103 K P4 K P6 K P12 K P19 K N6 G67 N5 The canned cycle does not alter the call parameters P22 P23 and P26 which may be used in later cycles However it does modify the values ofthe basic parameters defining the cycle The basic operation is described in detail in the Operating manual The exit conditions are GOO and G90 Chapter 8 Section Page MACHINING CANNED CYCLES GROOVING 13 G67 N5 8 7 MULTIPLE DRILLING CANNED CYCLE G67 N6 X 20 X20 enois 2 BEGIN E 7
282. the finishing pass is defined by the current of the programmed feedrate If the cycle does not have a finishing pass the tool will move to the cycle calling point after running the last roughing pass 6 The CNC stops the spindle Atention It must be borne in mind that the CNC applies tool radius compensation on the last pass or finishing pass in order to obtain the proper part finish It is necessary to indicate on the tool offset table the cutter tip radius value as well as the location code tool shape of the tool to machine with Page Chapter 5 Section 24 AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS ROUNDING 5 5 3 AUTOMATIC PROFILE ROUNDING 8050510 The CNC will show the current BEGIN and END values being possible to select new ones if so desired The following data must also be defined O Defines the angle of the first rounding section which goes from the BEGIN point with respect to the Z axis OQ Defines the angle of the second rounding section which ends at the END point with respect to the Z axis Since it has no key for its selection proceed in either one of the following ways Press the X key several times Select another data and then use the up and down arrow keys to select this parameter When defining the X and 1 angles indicate the number of degrees between the machining path and the Z axis taking always into account the direction of movement
283. the manufacturer has not set a tool change position General concepts 1 The machining conditions feedrate spindle speed etc must be programmed before calling the cycle 2 These parameters must be programmed in the block before the one calling the cycle N2 F10 1000 M03 N4 P16 K P100 K P101 K P102 K P103 K P4 K P9 K P10 K PI5 K N6 G67 N4 3 The canned cycle does not alter the call parameters P22 P23 and P26 which may be used in later cycles However it does modify the values of the basic parameters defining the cycle 4 The basic operation is described in detail in the Operating manual 5 The exit conditions are GOO and G90 Chapter 8 MACHINING CANNED CYCLES Section ROUNDING G67 N4 Page 11 8 6 GROOVING CANNED CYCLE G67 N5 H F 1 I l I a a I I I I I I I I l i MESE qu eRe eee ee PEE RP gt Z 8050701 Basic parameters defining a cycle P100 P101 P102 P103 P4 P6 P12 P13 P19 P20 X coordinate of the BEGIN point in the selected units in radius or diameter Z coordinate of the BEGIN point X coordinate of the END point in the selected units in radius or diameter Z coordinate of the END point Grooving pass D It must have a positive radius value If programmed with a 0 value the CNC will assume parameter P5 number of grooving passes If both P4 and P5 are equal to 0
284. the max step P7 Finishing stock allowance along X axis It must be greater or equal to zero or error 3 will be issued P8 Finishing stock allowance along Z axis It must be greater or equal to zero or error 3 will be issued P9 Feedrate of the finishing pass If P9 0 there will beno finishing pass but there will bea final roughing pass maintaining the excess material indicated by P7 and P8 Ifithasanegative value neither a final roughing pass nor a finishing pass will be carried out Page Chapter 8 Section 28 MACHINING CANNED CYCLES o RUE P9 0 P9 0 P9 gt 0 Last roughing pass Y Finishing pass End point This parameter must be assigned a value other than 0 in order for the CNC to carry out a final roughing pass prior to the finishing pass P10 Finishing pass 0 P950 P10 Finishing pass Last roughing pass Number of the first block to define the profile P13 Number of the last block to define the pattern It must be higher than P13 or error 13 will be issued P14 Page 29 Section STOCK REMOVAL ALONG Z G69 Chapter 8 MACHINING CANNED CYCLES When programming this canned cycle the following should be borne in mind I The distance between the starting point 0 and point B along the Z axis must be equal or greater than P8 To avoid passes that are too thin or generating error P31 when operating with tool compen
285. this command it asks whether it is desired to Replace by pressing ENTER The new operation will occupy the selected position and the previous operation will disappear The rest of the operations will keep their original positions Insert by pressing 1 The new operation will occupy the selected position and the one which was there before as well as the following ones including the free ones will be shifted back one position If position number 20 is already occupied the CNC will display a message indicating that this command cannot be executed Ignore do nothing by pressing CLEAR Notes When editing several operations of a part program it is recommended to start from operation 1 and use consecutive positions When executing a part program the CNC always starts from operation 1 and ends the execution when a free position is found even when the program has other operations Each one of the operations of the part program is stored in memory with all the data which was edited with Data specific to the operation BEGIN END angles increment etc Machining conditions F S T spindle turning direction etc Finishing pass finishing feedrate finishing tool and safety distances along X and Z Chapter 7 Section Page WORKING WITH PART PROGRAMS PART PROGRAM EDITING 3 7 4 PART PROGRAM SIMULATION With this CNC it is possible to simulate or check a part program in dry run befor
286. ths may be straight to straight or curve to straight G38 must be followed by the radius of the entry arc R4 3 in mm or R3 4 in inches The radius value must always be positive G38 R must be programmed in the block prior to the linear one either a G00 or a G01 being affected by it If the next programmed path after the one containing G38 R is an arc G02 or G03 the CNC will issue error 42 Example X axis programmed in radius xi Starting point X10 Z50 m N100 G90 G02 X30 Z30 R20 F N110 G01 X30 Z10 R 20 10 4 10 30 50 Z Same example applying a tangential exit with a 5mm radius Xd N100 G90 G38 R5 G02 X30 Z30 R20 N110 G01 X30 Z10 30 10 n 3 5 10 30 50 Z Page Chapter 5 Section 10 PATH CONTROL TANGENTIAL EXIT G38 5 10 AUTOMATIC RADIUS BLEND G36 On turning operations it is possible to round corners blend paths with a particular radius without the need to calculate the center of the arc or its starting and end points simply by using function G36 G36 is not modal and therefore must be programmed every time this feature is desired The blending radius is programmed by R4 3 in mm or R3 4 in inches and it must be a positive value Examples The X axis is programmed in diameter Ist radius blend Straight to straight X4 Starting point X20 Z60 N100 G90 G01 G36 R10 X80 40 L lt N110 Z10 S SN Q
287. ting Machine parameter P622 5 indicates whether the CNC allows setting a work zone or an exclusion zone P622 5 P622 5 0 This feature is not available 1 This feature is available X When using this feature P622 5 1 the following machine parameters must also be setto define the zone to be considered either as Work zone or exclusion zone P902 Most positive X coordinate P903 Least positive X coordinate P904 Most positive Z coordinate P905 Least positive Z coordinate The CNC must be turned off and back on in order for the new parameter values to be assumed Selection Once all machine parameters have been set PLCI outputs O46 and O47 must be used to select the predefined zone either as work zone or as an exclusion zone PLCI Output PLCI Output O46 047 04620 047 0 Feature disabled Work Zone or Exclusion Zone Feature 046 0 047 1 Zone enabled as Work Zone No exit zone 046 1 047 0 Zone enabled as Exclusion Zone No entry zone 046 1 047 1 Feature disabled Basic operation P622 5 1 On power up the CNC assumes the zone set by machine parameters P902 P903 P904 and P905 Nevertheless the zone boundaries may be changed via part program by allocating the new values to the following arithmetic parameters P206 Most positive X coordinate P207 Least positive X coordinate P208 Most positive Z coordinate P209 Least positive Z coordinate The CNC will t
288. to this product and to those products connected to it This unit must only be repaired by personnel authorized by Fagor Automation Fagor Automation shall notbe held responsible for any physical or material damage derived from the violation of these basic safety regulations Precautions against personal damage Before powering the unit up make sure that it is connected to ground Inorderto avoidelectrical discharges make sure that all the grounding connections are properly made Do not work in humid environments In order to avoid electrical discharges always work under 90 of relative humidity non condensing and 45 C 113 F Do not work in explosive environments In order to avoid risks damage do no work in explosive environments Precautions against product damage Working environment This unit is ready to be used in Industrial Environments complying with the directives and regulations effective in the European Community Fagor Automation shall not be held responsible for any damage suffered or caused when installed in other environments residential or homes Install the unit in the right place Itisrecommended whenever possible to instal the CNC away from coolants chemical product blows etc that could damage it This unit complies with the European directives on electromagnetic compatibility Nevertheless it is recommended to keep it away from sources of electromagnetic disturbance such as Powerful loads conne
289. tock allowance on the X axis It must be greater or equal to zero or error 3 will be issued Finishing stock allowance along the Z axis It must be greater or equal to zero or error 3 will be issued Feedrate of the finishing pass If itis zero there will be no finishing pass If itis negative error 3 will be issued P18 Distance between the point A and the arc s center along the X axis Although the X axis is programmed in diameter the values of I are always programmed in radius P19 K distance between the point A and the arc s center along the Z axis Page Chapter 8 Section TURNING WITH CURVED 36 MACHINING CANNED CYCLES SECTIONS G84 Programming example in diameter Starting point 0 X149 Z86 Profile points A X0 Z71 B X120 Z11 Arc center C X160 Z91 N90 GOO X149 Z86 esee Tool positioning at point 0 N100 G84 PO KO P1 K71 P2 K120 P3 K11 P5 K5 P7 K4 P8 K4 P9 K100 P18 K80 P19 K20 When programming this canned cycle take into account the following aspects 1 Thedistance between the starting point 0 and final point B along the Z axis must be equal or greater than P8 To avoid passes that are too thin or generating error 31 when operating with tool compensation the value of this distance from 0 to B should be equal to P8 N P5 N being an entire number 2 The distance between the starting point 0 and the point A along the X axis should be higher than P7
290. tool and assumes it for the automatic operation being edited It must be borne in mind that the CNC uses this tool for roughing and that it is possible to select another tool for the finishing pass Atention When storing an automatic operation the CNC stores all these machining conditions together with the values and parameters defining the cycle This way when executing a part previously stored the CNC will execute each one of the automatic operations with the tool spindle turning direction spindle speed finishing pass finishing tool and safety distances defined while editing it Chapter 6 Section Page PROFILES AUTOMATIC MODE 9 CYCLE 6 2 1 PROFILE DEFINITION When selecting the AUTOMATIC MODE CYCLE the CNC show the values corresponding to the profile points currently available being possible to select new values if so desired The following data must also be defined H Defines the amount of material to be removed from the original part It is programmed in radius Ifprogrammed with a positive value the CNC will perform roughing passes parallel to the programmed profile If programmed with a 0 value the CNC will perform one single finishing pass no roughing passes If programmed with a negative value the roughing pass will be a turning or facing pass Also if a profile is defined with valleys the CNC will issue the corresponding error Since there
291. tration angle It is referred to the X axis a a 0 a Em l i i 1 I Y I SA e Aa gt i i Y IN D If 0 1s programmed the thread will be done with radial penetration If a value equal to half the tool angle is assigned the penetration will be done along the side of the thread Inside and outside threads are possible The bottom right hand side of the screen shows the currently selected thread type Another one may be selected by means of the up and down arrow keys Basic operation It is possible to execute the thread from beginning to end without interruptions or a pass at a time by pressing Once the proper data has been entered press Bx for the CNC to perform the thread Before starting to execute the CNC will calculate the real penetration for each threading pass and the depth used at the finishing pass The machining steps will be the following Chapter 5 Section Page AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS THREADING 33 1 The spindle will start with the selected speed and turning direction 2 Ifthe cycle has been programmed to be executed with another tool the CNC will perform a tool change moving the axes to the tool change position if so required by the machine 3 The tool will approach the Begin point keeping the selected safety distance from it along the X and Z axes XA Safety distance on Z END gt a id BEGIN us distance AS on X SSeS Sea ane SS SS SSS
292. ue it is possible to press ENTER The CNC updates the display information with this new value but the spindle keeps turning if it was at the previously selected speed In order to make the live tool turn at the new speed must be pressed The CNC updates the display information and the live tool starts turning at the new selected speed To stop the live tool a 0 speed must be selected by means of the following keystroke sequence S 0 ENTER If the manufacturer has set the corresponding machine parameter allowing the live tool speed to be overridden it will be possible to do so by means of the spindle speed override keys located on the operator panel Chapter 2 Section Page BASIC OPERATIONS LIVE TOOL 3 2 3 AXES JOG 2 3 1 CONTINUOUS JOG With this option it is possible to jog the axes of the machine one at a time Once the axis feedrate has been preset and the feedrate override 0 thru 120 has been selected at the operator panel switch FEED press the JOG key corresponding to the desired axis and its jogging direction Depending on the value assigned to machine parameter P12 this movement will be carried out as follows If P12zY the axes will move while the selected JOG key is kept pressed If P12 N the axes will start moving when the JOG key is pressed and it will stop when either the key or the JOG key for another axis is pressed In this latter case the ot
293. unctions G90 and G91 are incompatible with each other Examples when the X axis is programmed in diameter X BUUS ea umm 20L 1 MPTS7 A 194 036 90 Starting point PO X20 Z50 Absolute programming G90 N100 G90 G01 X40 Z30 N110 X60 Z20 PO gt Pl P gt P2 Incremental programming G91 N100 G91 G01 X20 Z 20 N110 X20 Z 10 PO gt Pl P gt P2 Starting point P0 X40 Z40 Absolute programming G90 N100 G90 G02 X100 Z10 140 K10 or N100 G90 G02 X100 Z10 R41 231 Incremental programming G91 N100 G91 G02 X60 Z 30 140 K10 or N100 G91 G02 X60 Z 30 R41 231 Z Page Chapter 2 2 COORDINATE PROGRAMMING Section ABSOLUTE G90 INCREMENTAL G91 2 3 COORDINATE PROGRAMMING With this CNC it is possible to program the axis coordinates in the following formats Cartesian coordinates Polar coordinates Programming by two angles Programming by one angle and one cartesian coordinate 2 3 1 CARTESIAN COORDINATES Their programming format is In mm X 4 3 Z 4 3 In inches X 3 4 Z 3 4 The values of the programmed coordinates will be either absolute or incremental depending on whether G90 or G91 has been programmed Positive coordinate values do not require the sign Leading zeros as well as trailing decimal zeros may also be omitted 0010 100 10 1 Example X axis programmed in diameter being X60 Z70 the starting point
294. units radius or diameter The CNC requests the work piece dimension along the Z axis Key in this value and press ENTER The CNC requests the number of the tool being calibrated Press TOOL then key in the tool number and then press 1 for the CNC to select it Move the axes by means of either the mechanical handwheels the electronic handwheel or the JOG keys on the Operator Panel until the tool touches the work piece along the X axis Then press the keystroke sequence X ENTER The CNC will show the work piece coordinate along the X axis and the tool will be calibrated along this axis Move the axes by means of either the mechanical handwheels the electronic handwheel or the JOG keys on the Operator Panel until the tool touches the work piece along the Z axis Then press the keystroke sequence Z ENTER The CNC will show the work piece coordinate along the Z axis and the tool will be calibrated along this axis The CNC will request a new tool to be calibrated Repeat steps 3 4 and 5 as needed Press END To quit this mode and return to the standard display mode Page Chapter 3 Section AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS TOOL CALIBRATION 3 4 3 TOOL INSPECTION With this option it is possible to interrupt the execution of program P99996 and inspect the tool to check its status and change it if necessary To do this follow these steps a b c d e Press to interrupt th
295. will be issued P9 Feedrateofthe finishing pass If itis zero there will be no finishing pass If itis negative error 3 will be issued Programming example in diameter Starting point 0 X134 Z47 and profile points A XO Z0 and B X90 Z 45 N90 GOO X134 ZAT oncocnnccccnocccononcnononancnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos Tool positioning at point 0 N100 G81 PO KO P1 K0 P2 K90 P3 K 45 P5 K5 P7 K3 P8 K4 P9 K100 Page Chapter 8 Section TURNING WITH STRAIGHT 32 MACHINING CANNED CYCLES SECTIONS G81 When programming this canned cycle the following should be borne in mind 1 Thedistancebetween the starting pointO and final point B along the X axis must be equal or greater than P7 To avoid passes that are too thin or generating error 31 when operting with tool compensation the value of this distance from 0 to B should be equal to P7 NP5 N being an entire number 2 The distance from 0 to A along Z axis should be higher than P8 3 The machining conditions feedrate spindle rotation etc must be programmed before calling the cycle The parameters can be programmed in the calling block or in previous blocks This canned cycle does not alter the call parameters which may be used in later cycles However it does modify the values of parameters P70 through P99 The movements of the elementary work cycle see drawing are carried out as follows At the programmed feedrate from point 1 to point 2 and from
296. y will appear to the right of the main window For example if the axis display was in mm and the feedrate was given in mm rev the new units for the axis position will be inches and for the feedrate in inches rev It must be borne in mind that the values stored for BEGIN and END the data for special operations and the data corresponding to the point to point movement mode have no units Therefore the values will remain the same when toggling from mm to inches or vice versa Chapter 3 Section Page AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS UNITS 1 3 2 RADIUS DIAMETER When selecting this option the CNC changes the display units for the X axis from radius to diameter or vice versa and it shows the X axis coordinates in the new selected units The text corresponding to these units will also change These units appear to the right of the X position value coordinate It must be borne in mind that the values stored for BEGIN and END the data for special operations and the data corresponding to the point to point movement mode have no units Therefore the values will remain the same when toggling from radius to diameter or vice versa 3 3 F MM INCHES MIN F MM INCHES REV When selecting this option the CNC changes the units corresponding to the axis feedrate from mm min to mm rev or vice versa when the display is in mm or from inches min to inches rev or vice versa when the display is in inches These units ap
297. zero point VLLL P908 Reference point When the feedback system has a coded lo this pointis only used when leadscrew error compensation is needed The leadscrew error on this point must be 0 Scale offset setting The scale offset must be adjusted on one axis at a time The following procedure is recommended Indicate by parameters P600 7 amp P600 6 the up or down flank of the marker pulse Io of the feedback system Indicate by parameters P618 8 amp P618 7 the home searching direction for the axes Set parameters P807 and P808 with the home searching feedrate for the axes Set parameters P908 and P909 to 0 scale offset 2 THREADING WITH CONSTANT PENETRATION PASSES 3 Position the axis at the right position and execute the home search command for that axis NE X or Z up arrow keys and When done with the home search the CNC will display the axis position with respect to the scale s Zero point v After moving the axis to Machine Reference Zero point home or up to a known position with respect to home Jot down the position reading of the CNC for that known position The value to allocate to the machine parameter setting the scale s offset must be calculated with the following formula Value CNC reading at that point Home coordinate of that point Example for the X axis Ifthe known position is physically located at 230 mm from Machine Reference Zero home and

CNC 800T USER

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents